071 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
COPYRIGHT All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of the author. This publication shall not, by way of trade or otherwise, be lent, resold, hired out or otherwise circulated without the author's prior consent. Produced and Published by the CLICK2PPSC LTD EDITION 2.00.00 2001 This is the second edition of this manual, and incorporates all amendments to previous editions, in whatever form they were issued, prior to July 1999. EDITION 2.00.00
© 1999,2000,2001
G LONGHURST
The information contained in this publication is for instructional use only. Every effort has been made to ensure the validity and accuracy of the material contained herein, however no responsibility is accepted for errors or discrepancies. The texts are subject to frequent changes which are beyond our control.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Online Documentation Help Pages
Help TO NAVIGATE THROUGH THIS MANUAL When navigating through the manual the default style of cursor will be the hand symbol. This version of the CD-Online manual also supports a mouse incorporating a wheel/ navigation feature. When the hand tool is moved over a link on the screen it changes to a hand with a pointing finger. Clicking on this link will perform a pre-defined action such as jumping to a different position within the file or to a different document. Navigation through a manual can be done in the following ways:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Online Documentation Help Pages
Help The INDEX button takes you to the Index of the manual you are in, if it is available.
The CONTENTS button takes you to the first page of the main Table Of Contents.
The EMAIL button enables you to send us your comments regarding this product, provided you have an internet connection.
The WEB button takes you to the Click2PPSC web site.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
The PAGE button takes you to the previous and next pages in the book.
The BACK button returns you to your previous position in the document.
The SEARCH button allows you to search for specific words within the manual (More information can be found in the ‘Searching’ section). The arrows are used to display the previous and next words whilst using the search tool.
The HELP button takes you to the help pages.
The EXIT button exits from the application.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Operation of Aircraft International Commercial Air Transport Operations JAR-OPS Requirements Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures Polar Navigation Special Operational Procedures Windshear
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
TABLE OF CONTENTS Wake Turbulence Security Emergency and Precautionary Landings Fuel Jettison Transport of Dangerous Goods Contaminated Runways
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Introduction Operational Procedure extends the syllabus into areas that previously were covered mainly at the type conversion stage of training. The subject matter includes both ICAO and JAR standards and requirements as well as safety and other special procedures. Some aspects of Operational Procedures overlap other areas of the syllabus, however, to provide continuity, these notes are intended to be self contained.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Operation of Aircraft
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft
1
Operation of Aircraft
This Chapter is based on ICAO Annex Part 1.
Definitions 1.
The following definitions are relevant to operation of aircraft:
Aerial work.
An aircraft operation in which an aircraft is used for specialised services such as agriculture, construction, photography, surveying, observation and patrol, search and rescue, aerial advertisement, etc.
Aerodrome.
A defined area on land or water (including any buildings, installations and equipment) intended to be used either wholly or in part for the arrival, departure and surface movement of aircraft.
Aerodrome operating minima.
Chapter 1 Page 1
The limits of usability of an aerodrome for:
(a)
take-off expressed in terms of visibility or runway visual range (RVR), and if necessary, cloud conditions;
(b)
landing in precision approach and landing operations, expressed in terms of visibility and/or RVR and decision altitude/height (DA/H) as appropriate to the category of the operation; and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft (c)
landing in non-precision approach and landing operations, expressed in terms of visibility and/or RVR, minimum descent altitude/height (MDA/H) and if necessary cloud conditions.
Aeroplane.
A power-driven heavier-than-aircraft, deriving its lift in flight chiefly from aerodynamic reactions on surfaces which remain fixed under given conditions of flight.
Aeroplane flight manual.
A manual, associated with the certificate of airworthiness, containing limitations within which the aeroplane is to be considered airworthy, and instructions and information necessary to the flight crew members for the safe operation of the aeroplane.
Aircraft operating manual.
A manual acceptable to the State of the Operator containing:
(a)
normal operating procedures;
(b)
abnormal and emergency procedures;
(c)
checklists;
(d)
aircraft limitations;
(e)
aircraft performance information;
(f)
details of aircraft systems;
(g)
other material relevant to the operation of the aircraft.
Note. The aircraft operating manual is part of the operations manual.
Chapter 1 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft Aircraft. Any machine that can derive support in the atmosphere from the reactions of the air other than the reactions of the air against the earth’s surface. Air operator certificate (AOC).
A certificate authorising an operator to carry out specified
commercial air transport operations.
Alternate aerodrome.
An aerodrome to which an aircraft may proceed when it becomes impossible or inadvisable to proceed or to land at the aerodrome of intended landing. Alternate aerodromes include the following: •
Take-off alternate. An alternate aerodrome at which an aircraft can land should this become necessary shortly after take-off and it is not possible to use the aerodrome of departure.
•
En-route alternate. An aerodrome at which an aircraft would be able to land after experiencing an abnormal or emergency condition while en-route.
•
ETOPS en-route alternate. A suitable and appropriate alternate aerodrome at which an aeroplane would be able to land after experiencing an engine shut-down or other abnormal or emergency condition while en-route in an ETOPS operation.
•
Destination alternate. An alternate aerodrome to which an aircraft may proceed should it become impossible or inadvisable to land at the aerodrome of intended landing.
NOTE: The aerodrome from which a flight departs may also be an en-route or a destination alternate aerodrome for that flight.
Chapter 1 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft Cabin attendant. A crew member who performs in the interest of safety of passengers, duties assigned by the operator or pilot-in-command of the aircraft, but who must not act as a flight crew member. Commercial air transport operation. An aircraft operation involving the transport of passengers, cargo or mail for remuneration or hire. Configuration deviation list (CDL).
A list established by the organisation responsible for the aircraft type design with the approval of the State of Design which identifies any external parts of an aircraft type which may be missing at the commencement of a flight, and which contains, where necessary, any information on associated operating limitations and performance corrections.
Crew member.
A person assigned by an operator to duty on an aircraft during flight time.
Cruising level.
A level maintained during a significant portion of a flight.
Dangerous goods.
Articles or substances which are capable of posing significant risk to health, safety or property when transported by air.
Decision altitude/height (DA/H).
A specified altitude or height (A/H) in the precision approach at which a missed approach must be initiated if the required visual reference to continue the approach has not been established.
NOTE: Decision altitude (DA) is referenced to mean sea level (MSL) and decision height (DH) is referenced to the threshold elevation.
Chapter 1 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft NOTE: The required visual reference means that section of the visual aids or of the approach area which should have been in view for sufficient time for the pilot to have made an assessment of the aircraft position and rate of change of position, in relation to the desired flight path.
Emergency locator transmitter (ELT).
A generic term describing equipment which broadcast distinctive signals on designated frequencies, and depending on application may either sense a crash and operate automatically or be manually activated.
Flight crew member. A licensed crew member charged with duties essential to the operation of an aircraft during flight time. Flight duty period. The total time from the moment a flight crew member commences duty, immediately subsequent to a rest period and prior to making a flight or a series of flights, to the moment the flight crew member is relieved of all duties having completed such flight or series of flights. Flight plan.
Specified information provided to air traffic services units, relative to an intended flight or portion of a flight of an aircraft.
Flight recorder.
Any type of recorder installed in the aircraft for the purpose of complementing accident/incident investigation.
Flight time.
The total time from the moment an aircraft first moves under its own power for the purpose of taking-off until the moment it comes to rest at the end of the flight.
Chapter 1 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft NOTE: Flight time as here defined is synonymous with the term ‘block to block’ time or ‘chock to chock’ time in general usage which is measured from the time the aircraft moves from the loading point until it stops at the unloading point.
General aviation operation.
An aircraft operation other than a commercial air transport operation or an aerial work operation.
Human factors principles.
Principles which apply to aeronautical design, certification, training, operations and maintenance and which seek safe interface between the human and other system components by proper consideration to human performance.
Human performance.
Human capabilities and limitations which have an impact on the safety and efficiency of aeronautical operations.
Instrument approach and landing operations. Instrument approach and landing operations using instrument approach procedures are classified as follows: •
Non-precision approach and landing operations. An instrument approach and landing which does not use electronic glide path guidance.
•
Precision approach and landing operations. An instrument approach and landing using precision azimuth and glide path guidance with minima as determined by the category of operation.
Categories of precision approach and landing operations are:
Chapter 1 Page 6
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft (a)
Category I (CAT I). A precision approach with a decision height not lower than 60m (200ft) and with either a visibility not less than 800m or an RVR of note less than 550m;
(b)
Category II (CAT II). A precision instrument approach and landing with a decision height lower than 60m (200ft) but not lower than 30m (100ft), and an RVR not less than 350m (but, note JAR-OPS 1 specifies 300m)*.
(c)
Category IIIA (CAT IIIA). A precision instrument approach and landing with:
(d)
(e)
(i)
a decision height lower than 30m (100ft) or no decision height; and
(ii)
an RVR not less than 200m;
Category IIIB (CAT IIIB). A precision instrument approach and landing with: (i)
a decision height lower than 15m (50ft) or no decision height; and
(ii)
an RVR less than 200m but not less than 50m (but, note JAR-OPS 1 specifies 75m)*.
Category IIIC (CAT IIIC). A precision instrument approach and landing with no decision height and no RVR limitations.
* Minima quoted in either Annex 6 or JAR-OPS may be used in JAR-FCL examinations.
Large aeroplane.
Chapter 1 Page 7
An aeroplane of a maximum certificated take-off mass of over 5700kg.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft Maintenance.
Tasks required to ensure the continued airworthiness of an aircraft including any one or combination of overhaul, repair, inspection, replacement, modification or defect rectification.
Minimum descent altitude/height (MDA/H).
A specified altitude or height in a non-precision approach or circling approach below which a descent must not be made without the required visual reference. Note 1. MDA is referenced to mean sea level (msl) and MDH is referenced to the aerodrome elevation or to the threshold if it is more than 2m (7ft) below aerodrome elevation. Note 2. In the case of a circling approach the required visual reference is the runway environment.
Instrument meteorological conditions (IMC).
Meteorological conditions expressed in terms of visibility, distance from cloud, and ceiling, less than the minima specified for visual meteorological conditions.
Master minimum equipment list (MMEL).
A list established for a particular aircraft type by the organisation responsible for the type design approval of the State of Design containing items, one or more if which is permitted to be unserviceable at the commencement of a flight. The MMEL may be associated with special conditions, limitations or procedures.
Maximum mass.
Maximum certificated take-off mass.
Minimum equipment list (MEL).
A list which provides for the operation of aircraft, subject to specified conditions, with particular equipment inoperative, prepared by an operator in conformity with, or more restrictive than, the MMEL established for the aircraft type.
Chapter 1 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft Night.
The hours between the end of evening civil twilight and the beginning of morning civil twilight or such other period between sunset and sunrise, as may be prescribed by the appropriate authority.
NOTE: Civil twilight ends in the evening when the centre of the sun’s disc is 6° below the horizon, and aligns in the morning when the centre of the sun’s disc is 6° below the horizon.
Obstacle clearance altitude/height (OCA/H).
The lowest altitude (OCA), or alternatively the lowest height above the elevation of the relevant runway threshold or above the aerodrome elevation as applicable (OCH), used in establishing compliance with appropriate obstacle clearance criteria. Note 1. Obstacle clearance altitude is referenced to mean sea level (msl) and obstacle clearance height to the threshold elevation or, in the case of non-precision approaches to the aerodrome elevation (or threshold elevation if it is more than 2m (7ft) below aerodrome elevation. OCH for a circling approach is referenced to aerodrome elevation.
Operational control.
The exercise of authority over the initiation, continuation, diversion or termination of a flight in the interest of the safety of the aircraft and the regularity and efficiency of the flight.
Operational flight plan.
The operator’s plan for the safe conduct of the flight based on considerations of aeroplane performance, other operating limitations and relevant expected conditions on the route to be followed and at the aerodromes concerned.
Chapter 1 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft Operator.
A person, organisation or enterprise engaged in or offering to engage in an aircraft
operation.
Pilot-in-Command.
The pilot responsible for the operation and safety of the aircraft during
flight time.
Pressure-altitude. An atmospheric pressure expressed in terms of altitude which corresponds to that pressure in the Standard Atmosphere. RNP type. A containment value expressed as a distance in nautical miles from the intended position within which flights would be for at least 95% of the total flying time. Rest period.
Any period of time on the ground during which a flight crew member is relieved of all duties by the operator.
Required navigation performance (RNP).
A statement of the navigation performance necessary for operation within a defined airspace.
Runway visual range.
The range over which the pilot of an aircraft on the centre line of a runway can see the runway surface markings or the lights delineating the runway or identifying its centre line.
Small aeroplane.
An aeroplane of maximum certificated take-off mass of 5700kg or less.
State of the Operator.
The State in which the operator’s principal place of business is located or, if there is no such place of business, the operator’s permanent residence.
State of Registry.
Chapter 1 Page 10
The State on whose register the aircraft is entered.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft NOTE: In the case of the registration of aircraft of an international operating agency on other than a national basis, the States constituting the agency are jointly and severally bound to assume the obligations which, under the Chicago Convention, attach to a State of Registry.
Synthetic flight trainer.
Any one of the following three types of apparatus in which flight conditions are simulated on the ground:
Chapter 1 Page 11
•
A flight simulator - which provides an accurate representation of the flight deck of a particular aircraft type to the extent that the mechanical, electrical, electronic, etc., aircraft systems control functions, the normal environment of flight crew members, and the performance and flight characteristics of that type of aircraft are realistically simulated.
•
A flight procedures trainer - which provides a realistic flight deck environment, and which simulates instrument responses, simple control functions of mechanical, electrical, electronic, etc. aircraft systems, and the performance and flight characteristics of aircraft of a particular class.
•
A basic instrument flight trainer - which is equipped with appropriate instruments, and which simulates the flight deck environment of an aircraft in flight in instrument flight conditions.
•
Visual meteorological conditions (VMC). Meteorological conditions expressed in terms of visibility, distance from cloud, and ceiling, equal to or better than specified minima.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Operation of Aircraft
Applicability of ICAO Standards 2. ICAO Annex 6 contains the Standards and Recommended Practices applicable to the operation of aircraft. Part 1 of the Annex which is relevant to this syllabus concerns the operation of aircraft for international commercial air transport. The Standards contained in Annex 6 are mandatory unless a Contracting State has notified a difference to ICAO.
Chapter 1 Page 12
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
International Commercial Air Transport Operations General Flight Operations Aeroplane Performance and Operating Limitations Aeroplane Instruments, Equipment and Flight Documents Aeroplane Communication and Navigation Equipment Aeroplane Maintenance Aeroplane Flight Crew Manuals, Logs and Records Security Lights To Be Displayed By Aeroplanes
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 2
This Chapter is based on ICAO Annex 6 Part 1. Note. The term Authority used in this Chapter means the official body having responsibility for the administration of civil aviation on behalf of a State (e.g. in the UK the CAA are the Authority).
General Operator Responsibilities 1. Knowledge of Laws of other States. An operator shall ensure that all employees when abroad know that they must comply with the laws, regulations and procedures of those States in which operations are conducted. 2. Flight crew knowledge. An operator shall ensure that all pilots and other members of the flight crew of an aeroplane are familiar with the laws, regulations and procedures, pertinent to the performance of their duties, prescribed for the areas to be traversed, the aerodromes to be used and the air navigation facilities relating thereto. 3. Control of operations. An operator or a designated representative shall have the responsibility for operational control.
Chapter 2 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 4. Emergency violation of local regulations. The local Authority must be informed, without delay, by a pilot-in-command when in taking action to avoid danger, local regulations or procedures are violated. If required, the pilot-in-command must submit a report to the local Authority, with a copy to the State of the Operator. Such reports shall be submitted as soon as possible and normally within ten days. 5. Provisions of search and rescue information. Operators shall ensure that pilots-in-command have available on board the aeroplane all the essential information concerning the search and rescue services in the area over which the aeroplane will be flown. 6. Accident prevention. An operator shall establish and maintain an accident prevention and flight safety programme. 7. Dangerous Goods. The responsibilities of the operator with regard to the safe transportation of dangerous goods are contained in ICAO Annex 18.
Flight Operations Operating Facilities 8. An operator shall ensure that a flight will not be commenced unless it has been ascertained by every reasonable means available that the ground facilities available and directly required on such flight, for the safe operation of the aeroplane and the protection of the passengers, are adequate for the type of operation under which the flight is to be conducted and are adequately operated for this purpose.
Chapter 2 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 9. Subject to their published conditions of use, aerodromes and their facilities shall be kept continuously available for flight operations, during their published hours of operations, irrespective of weather conditions.
The Air Operator Certificate 10. An operator shall not engage in commercial air transport unless in possession of a valid air operator certificate or equivalent document issued by the State of the Operator. 11. The issue of an operator certificate or equivalent document by the State of the Operator shall be dependent upon the operator demonstrating an adequate organisation, method of control and supervision of flight operations, training programme and maintenance arrangements consistent with the nature and extent of the operations specified. 12.
Chapter 2 Page 3
The air operator certificate or equivalent document shall contain at least the following: (a)
Operator’s identification (name, location);
(b)
Date of issue and period of validity;
(c)
Description of the types of operations authorised;
(d)
The type (s) of aircraft authorised for use; and
(e)
Authorised areas of operation or routes.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Operations Manual 13. An operator shall provide, for the use and guidance of operations personnel concerned, an operations manual.
Operating Instructions – General 14. An operator shall ensure that all operations personnel are properly instructed in their particular duties and responsibilities and the relationship of such duties to the operation as a whole. 15. An aeroplane shall not be taxied on the movement area of an aerodrome unless the person at the controls:
Chapter 2 Page 4
(a)
Has been duly authorised by the operator or a designated agent;
(b)
Is fully competent to taxi the aeroplane;
(c)
Is qualified to use the radio telephone; and
(d)
Has received instruction from a competent person in respect of aerodrome layout, routes, signs, markings, lights, air traffic control (ATC) signals and instructions, phraseology and procedures, and is able to conform to the operational standards required for safe aeroplane movement at the aerodrome.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
In-flight Simulation of Emergency Situations 16. An operator shall ensure that when passengers are being carried, emergency situations affecting the flight characteristics of the aeroplane shall not be simulated and shall instruct all flight crew and operations personnel to this effect.
Checklists 17. Checklists shall be used by flight crews prior to, during and after all phases of operations, and in emergency, to ensure compliance with the operating procedures contained in the aircraft operating manual and the aeroplane flight manual, or other documents associated with the certificate of airworthiness and otherwise in the operations manual.
Minimum Flight Altitudes 18. An operator shall be permitted to establish minimum flight altitudes for those routes flown for which minimum flight altitudes have been established by the State flown over, provided that they shall not be less than those established by that State. 19.
Chapter 2 Page 5
Factors to be considered in establishing minimum flight altitudes are: (a)
the accuracy and reliability of the aircraft’s navigation system;
(b)
the inaccuracies of the altimeter;
(c)
the characteristics of the terrain (e.g. sudden changes of elevation);
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (d)
the probability of encountering adverse meteorological conditions (e.g. severe turbulence and downdraughts);
(e)
the possible inaccuracies in aeronautical charts;
(f)
airspace restrictions
These minimum flight altitudes shall not be established at a lower level than the minimum level for IFR flights as specified in ICAO Annex 2.
Aerodrome Operating Minima 20. The State of the Operator shall require that the operator establish aerodrome operating minima for each aerodrome to be used in all operations, and shall approve the method of determination of such minima. Such minima shall not be lower than any that may be established for such aerodromes by the State in which the aerodrome is located, except when specifically approved by that State. 21. The State of the Operator shall require that in establishing the aerodrome operating minima which will apply to any particular operation, full account shall be taken of:
Chapter 2 Page 6
(a)
the type, performance and handling characteristics of the aeroplane;
(b)
the composition of the flight crew, their competence and experience;
(c)
the dimensions and characteristics of the runways which may be selected for use;
(d)
the adequacy and performance of the available visual and non-visual ground aids;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (e)
the equipment available on the aeroplane for the purpose of navigation and/or control of the flight path during the approach to landing and the missed approach;
(f)
the obstacles in the approach and missed approach areas and the obstacle clearance altitude/height for the instrument approach procedures;
(g)
the means used to determine and report meteorological conditions; and
(h)
the obstacles in the climb-out areas and necessary clearance margins.
Passengers 22. Emergency and other equipment and exits. An operator shall ensure that passengers are made familiar with the location and use of:
Chapter 2 Page 7
(a)
seat belts and when they must be fastened;
(b)
emergency exits;
(c)
life jackets, if the carriage of life jackets is prescribed and when and how to use them;
(d)
oxygen dispensing equipment, if the provision of oxygen for the use of passengers is prescribed; and
(e)
other emergency equipment provided for individual use including passenger briefing cards;
(f)
emergency exits
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 23. The operator shall inform the passengers of the location and general manner of use of the principal emergency equipment carried for collective use. 24. Seat belts. The operator shall ensure that during take-off and landing and whenever, by reasons of turbulence or any emergency occurring during flight, the precaution is considered necessary, all passengers on board an aeroplane shall be secured in their seats by means of the seat belts or harnesses provided.
Flight Preparation 25. A flight shall not be commenced until flight preparation forms have been completed certifying that the pilot-in-command is satisfied that:
Chapter 2 Page 8
(a)
the aeroplane is airworthy;
(b)
the appropriate instruments and equipment for the particular type of operation to be undertaken, are installed and are sufficient for the flight;
(c)
a maintenance release has been issued in respect of the aeroplane;
(d)
the mass of the aeroplane is such that the flight can be conducted safely, taking into account the flight conditions expected;
(e)
any load carried is properly distributed and safely secured;
(f)
a check has been completed indicating that the operating limitations can be complied with for the flight to be undertaken; and
(g)
the operational flight planning (see below) has been completed.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 26.
Completed flight preparation forms shall be kept by an operator for a period of three months.
Operational Flight Planning 27. An operational flight plan shall be completed for every intended flight. The operational flight plan shall be approved and signed by the pilot-in-command and, where applicable, signed by the flight operations officer, and a copy shall be filed with the operator or a designated agent, or, if these procedures are not possible, it shall be left with the aerodrome authority or on record in a suitable place at the point of departure. 28. The content and use of the operational flight plan must be described in the operations manual.
Alternate Aerodromes Take-Off Alternate Aerodrome 29. Requirement for take-off alternate. A take-off alternate aerodrome shall be selected and specified in the operational flight plan if the weather conditions at the aerodrome of departure are at or below the applicable aerodrome operating minima (for landing) or, it would not be possible to return to the aerodrome of departure for other reasons. 30. Location. The take-off alternate aerodrome shall be located within the following distance from the aerodrome of departure: (a)
Chapter 2 Page 9
for aeroplanes having two power-units. Not more than a distance equivalent to a flight time of one hour at the single-engine cruise speed; and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (b)
for aeroplanes having three or more power-units. Not more than a distance equivalent to a flight time of two hours at the one-engine inoperative cruise speed.
31. Conditions at the alternate aerodrome. For an aerodrome to be selected as a take-off alternate the available information shall indicate that, at the estimated time of use, the conditions will be at or above the aerodrome operating minima for that operation.
En-route Alternate Aerodromes 32. En-route alternate aerodromes, required for extended range operations by aeroplanes with two turbine power-units, shall be selected and specified in the operational and ATS flight plans.
Destination Alternate Aerodrome 33. For a flight to be conducted in accordance with IFR instrument flight rules, at least one destination alternate aerodrome shall be specified in the operational and ATS flight plans, unless:
Chapter 2 Page 10
(a)
the duration of the flight and the meteorological conditions prevailing are such that there is reasonable certainty that, at the estimated time of arrival at the aerodrome of intended landing, and for a reasonable period before and after such time, the approach and landing may be made under visual meteorological conditions; or
(b)
the aerodrome of intended landing is isolated and there is no suitable destination alternate aerodrome.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Weather Conditions 34. VFR. A VFR flight shall not be commenced unless current meteorological reports or a combination of current reports and forecasts indicate that the meteorological conditions along the route or that part of the route to be flown under the visual flight rules will, at the appropriate time, be such as to render compliance with these rules possible. 35. IFR. An IFR flight shall not be commenced unless information is available which indicates that conditions at the aerodrome of intended landing or, where a destination alternate is required, at least one destination alternate aerodrome will, at the estimated time of arrival, be at or above the aerodrome operating minima. 36. Icing. A flight to be operated in known or expected icing conditions shall not be commenced unless the aeroplane is certificated and equipped to cope with such conditions.
Fuel and Oil Supply 37. All aeroplanes. A flight shall not be commenced unless, taking into account both the meteorological conditions and any delays that are expected in flight, the aeroplane carries sufficient fuel and oil to ensure that it can safely complete the flight. In addition, a reserve shall be carried to provide for contingencies.
NOTE: Where we have used the term destination in the following paragraphs this means the aerodrome to which the flight is planned.
Chapter 2 Page 11
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Propeller-driven Aeroplanes The fuel and oil required in the case of propeller-driven aeroplanes depends on whether a destination alternate is required or not. 38. Propeller-driven aeroplanes - destination alternate required. The aeroplane must have sufficient fuel and oil either to: (a)
fly to the destination and then on to the most critical alternate (in terms of fuel and oil) specified in the operational and ATS flight plan plus another 45minutes; or,
(b)
fly to the alternate via any pre-determined point plus another 45 minutes, provided this is not less than the amount required to fly to the destination plus either: (i)
45 minutes plus 15% of the cruising flight time; or
(ii)
2 hours; whichever is less.
39. Propeller-driven - destination alternate is not required. The aeroplane must have sufficient fuel and oil to: (a)
fly to a destination where a VMC approach and landing can be expected plus another 45 minutes; or
(b)
fly to an isolated destination from which there is no suitable alternate available plus: (i)
Chapter 2 Page 12
45 minutes plus 15% of the cruising flight time; or,
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (ii)
2 hours; whichever is less.
Turbo-jet Aeroplanes The fuel and oil required in the case of turbo-jet aeroplanes depends on whether a destination alternate is required or not. 40. Turbo-jet aeroplane – destination required. The aeroplane must have sufficient fuel and oil either to: (a)
fly to and execute an approach, and a missed approach, at the destination and thereafter:
(b)
Chapter 2 Page 13
(i)
fly to the alternate specified in the operational and ATS flight plans; plus,
(ii)
30 minutes holding at 1500ft at the alternate in ISA conditions, and approach to land; plus,
(iii)
contingency fuel to allow for any occurrences, specified by the operator and agreed by the State of the Operator, which might result in increased consumption; or,
fly to the alternate via any predetermined point and thereafter for 30 minutes at 1500ft at the alternate plus a contingency amount specified by the operator (as in previous sub-paragraph) provided that in total this is not less than the fuel required to fly to the destination plus 2 hours at the normal cruise consumption.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 41. oil:
Turbo-jet aeroplanes – destination not required. The aeroplane must have sufficient fuel and (a)
in the case of a destination where a VMC approach and landing can be expected, to fly there and in addition: (i)
30 minutes holding at 1500ft at the alternate in ISA conditions; plus,
(ii)
contingency fuel (as specified above); or,
(b)
in the case of an isolated destination from which there is no suitable alternate, to fly there plus an 2 hours at normal cruise consumption.
42. Factors to be considered in computing fuel required. In all cases the following factors must be considered:
Chapter 2 Page 14
(a)
meteorological forecast;
(b)
expected ATC routings and traffic delays;
(c)
for IFR flight, one instrument approach at destination, including a missed approach;
(d)
engine failure en-route and where applicable loss of cabin pressurisation;
(e)
any other reasons for delaying landing or increasing fuel/oil consumption.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Note. Nothing in Annex 6 concerning fuel/oil requirements precludes the amendment of a flight plan in flight in order to replan the flight to another aerodrome, provided that the requirements of the foregoing paragraphs can be complied with from where the flight has been replanned.
Refuelling with Passengers On Board 43. An aeroplane shall not be refuelled when passengers are embarking, on board or disembarking unless it is properly manned by qualified personnel ready to initiate and direct an evacuation of the aeroplane by the most practical and expeditious means available. 44. When refuelling with passengers embarking, on board or disembarking, two-way communication shall be maintained by the aeroplane’s inter-communication system or other suitable means between the ground crew supervising the refuelling and the qualified personnel on board the aeroplane. Note 1. The provisions outlined above do not necessarily require the deployment of integral aeroplane stairs or the opening of emergency exits as a pre-requisite to refuelling. Note 2. Additional precautions are required when refuelling with fuel other than aviation kerosene or when refuelling results in a mixture of aviation kerosene with other aviation turbine fuels, or when an open line is used.
Oxygen Supply Note. Approximate altitudes in the Standard Atmosphere corresponding to the values of absolute pressure used in the text are as follows:
Chapter 2 Page 15
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Absolute pressure
Metres
Feet
700 hPa
3000
10 000
620 hPa
4000
13 000
376 hPa
7600
25 000
45. Aeroplanes without cabin pressurisation. A flight to be operated at altitudes at which the atmospheric pressure in personnel compartments will be less than 700 hPa shall not be commenced unless sufficient stored breathing oxygen is carried to supply: (a)
all crew members and 10% of the passengers for any period in excess of 30 minutes that the aeroplane is between 10,000 ft and 13,000 ft; and
(b)
the crew and passengers for any period that the aeroplane is above 13,000 ft.
46. Aeroplanes with cabin pressurisation. A flight to be operated with a pressurised aeroplane shall not be commenced unless a sufficient quantity of stored breathing oxygen is carried to supply all the crew members and a proportion of the passenger’s, as is appropriate to the circumstances of the flight being undertaken, in the event of loss of pressurisation, for any period that the aeroplane is above 10,000 ft. In addition, a further 10 minutes oxygen is required for passengers when an aeroplane is operated above 25,000 ft or when below 25,000 ft but unable to descend safely to 13,000 ft within 4 mins.
Chapter 2 Page 16
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
In-flight Procedures Aerodrome Operating Minima 47. A flight shall not be continued towards the aerodrome of intended landing, unless the latest available information indicates that at the expected time of arrival, a landing can be effected at that aerodrome, or at least at one destination alternate aerodrome, in compliance with established aerodrome operating minima. 48. Except in case of emergency, an aeroplane shall not continue its approach-to-land at any aerodrome beyond a point at which the limits of the operating minima specified for that aerodrome would be infringed.
Flight Crew Members at Duty Stations 49. Take-off and landing. All flight crew members required to be on flight deck duty shall be at their stations. 50. En-route. All flight crew members required to be on flight deck shall remain at their stations except when their absence is necessary for the performance of duties in connection with the operation of the aeroplane or for physiological needs. 51.
Seat belts. All flight crew members shall keep their seat belts fastened when at their stations.
52. Safety harness. Any flight crew member occupying a pilot’s seat shall keep the safety harness fastened during the take-off and landing phases; all other flight crew members shall keep their safety harnesses fastened during the take-off and landing phases unless the shoulder straps interfere with the performance of their duties.
Chapter 2 Page 17
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Note. Safety harness includes shoulder straps and a seat belt which may be used independently.
In-flight Operational Instructions 53. Operational instructions involving a change in the ATS flight plan shall, when practicable, be co-ordinated with the appropriate ATS unit before transmission to the aeroplane. Note. When the above co-ordination has not been possible, operational instructions do not relieve a pilot of the responsibility for obtaining an appropriate clearance from an ATS unit, if applicable, before making a change in flight plan.
Duties of Pilot-in-Command 54. Responsibility for operation and safety. The pilot-in-command shall be responsible for the operation and safety of the aeroplane and for the safety of all persons on board, during flight time. 55.
Checklists. The pilot-in-command shall ensure that checklists are complied with in detail.
56. Accident notification. The pilot-in-command shall be responsible for notifying the nearest appropriate authority by the quickest available means of any accident involving the aeroplane, resulting in serious injury or death of any person or substantial damage to the aeroplane or property. 57. Reporting defects. The pilot-in-command shall be responsible for reporting all known or suspected defects in the aeroplane, to the operator, at the termination of the flight. 58. Journey log book/general declaration. The pilot-in-command shall be responsible for the journey log book or the general declaration.
Chapter 2 Page 18
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Duties of Flight Operations Officer 59.
A flight operations officer shall: (a)
assist the pilot-in-command in flight preparation and provide the relevant information required;
(b)
assist the pilot-in-command in preparing the operational and ATS flight plans, sign when applicable and file the ATS flight plan with the appropriate ATS unit;
(c)
furnish the pilot-in-command while in flight, by appropriate means, with information which may be necessary for the safe conduct of the flight; and,
(d)
in the event of an emergency, initiate such procedures as may be outlined in the operations manual.
60. A flight operations officer shall avoid taking any action that would conflict with the procedures established by:
Chapter 2 Page 19
(a)
air traffic control;
(b)
the meteorological service; or
(c)
the communications service.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Aeroplane Performance and Operating Limitations General 61. Aeroplanes are required to be operated in accordance with a comprehensive and detailed code of performance established by the state of Registry in compliance with the applicable Standards defined in ICAO Annex 6.
Performance Requirements for Public Transport Aeroplanes 62. A public transport flight may not commence unless the performance information provided in the flight manual indicates that the performance standards prescribed in Annex 6 can be complied with.
Factors Affecting Performance 63.
Chapter 2 Page 20
Factors that are deemed to affect significantly aircraft performance are: (a)
mass;
(b)
operating procedures;
(c)
pressure altitude appropriate to the elevation of the aerodrome;
(d)
temperature;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (e)
wind;
(f)
runway gradient;
(g)
condition of the runway i.e. presence of slush, water and/or ice.
Due account of these factors must be taken either, directly as operating parameters or, indirectly by means of allowances or margins, in the scheduling of performance data for the aeroplane being operated.
Limitations – Take-off Mass 64. The mass of the aeroplane at the start of take-off must not exceed the mass at which the aeroplane shall be able, in the event of a critical engine failing at any point in the take-off either, to discontinue the take-off and stop within the accelerate-stop distance available or, to continue the take-of and clear all obstacles along the flight path by an adequate margin until the aeroplane is in a position to comply with en-route criteria.
Limitations – Landing Mass 65. The mass of the aeroplane must be such that the aeroplane shall, at the aerodrome of intended landing and at any alternate aerodrome, after clearing all obstacles in the approach path by an safe margin, be able to land with assurance that it can stop within the landing distance available.
Multi-Engine Aeroplanes - Performance Operating Limitations 66. Take-off. The performance of the aeroplane as determined from the flight manual is required to ensure that:
Chapter 2 Page 21
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
67.
68.
Chapter 2 Page 22
(a)
the accelerate stop distance required does not exceed the accelerate stop distance available;
(b)
take-off distance required does not exceed the take-off distance available;
(c)
all obstacles within a specified distance of the take-off flight path are cleared by at least 35ft or 50ft (depending on performance category) within the take-off distance available.
En-route. (a)
One engine inoperative. At all points along the route or any planned diversion therefrom the aeroplane must be capable of a steady rate of climb at the minimum flight altitude (i.e. at least 1000ft above terrain adjacent to and along the flight path)
(b)
Two engines inoperative (applicable to four engine aeroplanes only). When at more than 90 minutes flying time (at 4 engine cruising speed) from an en-route alternate if two engines fail the aeroplane must be able to reach an alternate aerodrome without coming below the minimum flight altitude.
Landing distance.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (a)
Destination. The landing distance required at the aerodrome of intended landing, as determined from the flight manual, must not exceed a specified percentage of the landing distance available, (eg. for performance A aeroplanes it is 60% for turbo-jet; 70% for turbo-propeller powered aeroplanes). (Note. In terms of landing distance available (LDA), this means that the LDA for a turbo-jet aeroplane must be x 1.7 of the landing distance required and for a turbopropeller aeroplane, it must be x 1.43of the landing distance required).
(b)
Alternate. The landing distance at any alternate aerodrome must not exceed a specified percentage of the landing distance available, (eg. for performance A aeroplanes it is the same as for destination).
Aeroplane Instruments, Equipment and Flight Documents 69. Applicability. In addition to the minimum equipment necessary for the issuance of a certificate of airworthiness, the instruments, equipment and flight documents prescribed in Annex 6 must be installed or carried, as appropriate, in aeroplanes according to the aeroplane used and to the circumstances under which the flight is to be conducted. 70. Minimum equipment list. The operator shall include in the operations manual a minimum equipment list, approved by the State of the Operator which will enable the pilot-in-command to determine whether a flight may be commenced or continued from any intermediate stop should any instrument, equipment or systems become inoperative.
Chapter 2 Page 23
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 71. Operating manual. The operator shall provide operations staff and flight crew with an aircraft operating manual, for each aircraft type operated, containing: (a)
normal operating procedures
(b)
abnormal and emergency operating procedures
(c)
details of aircraft systems
(d)
checklists to be used
(e)
the design of the manual must observe Human Factor principles.
Requirements for all Aeroplanes on all Flights 72. Instruments. An aeroplane shall be equipped with instruments which will enable the flight crew to control the flight path of the aeroplane, carry out any required procedural manoeuvres and observe the operating limitations of the aeroplane in the expected operating conditions. 73. Medical supplies. An aeroplane must carry accessible and adequate medical supplies appropriate to its passenger carrying capacity which should comprise:
Chapter 2 Page 24
(a)
one or more first-aid kits; and
(b)
a medical kit, for the use of medical doctors or other qualified persons in treating inflight medical emergencies for aeroplanes authorised to carry more than 250 passengers.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 74. Portable fire extinguishers. An aeroplane must carry portable fire extinguishers of a type which, when discharged, will not cause dangerous contamination of the air within the aeroplane. At least one shall be located in:
75.
(a)
the pilot’s compartment; and
(b)
each passenger compartment that is separate from the pilot’s compartment and that is not readily accessible to the flight crew.
Seats and seat belts. An aeroplane must be equipped with: (a)
a seat or berth for each person over an age to be determined by the State of the Operator.
(b)
a seat belt for each seat and restraining belts for each berth; and
(c)
a safety harness for each flight crew seat. The safety harness for each pilot seat shall incorporate a device which will automatically restrain the occupant’s torso in the event of rapid deceleration. The safety harness for each pilot seat should also incorporate a device to prevent a suddenly incapacitated pilot from interfering with the flight controls.
Note. Safety harness includes shoulder straps and a seat belt which may be used independently. 76. Passenger information. The aeroplane must be equipped with the means of ensuring that the following information and instructions are conveyed to passengers: (a)
Chapter 2 Page 25
when seat belts are to be fastened;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (b)
when and how oxygen equipment is to be used if the carriage of oxygen is required;
(c)
restrictions on smoking;
(d)
location and use of life jackets of equivalent individual flotation devices where their carriage is required; and
(e)
location and method of opening emergency exits; and
77. Fuses. Spare electrical fuses of appropriate ratings for replacement of those accessible in flight must be carried. 78.
Documents. An aeroplane must carry: (a)
the operations manual, or those parts of it that pertain to flight operations;
(b)
the flight manual for the aeroplane, or other document containing performance data and any other information necessary for the operation of the aeroplane within the terms of its certificate of airworthiness, unless this data is in the operations manual; and
(c)
current and suitable charts to cover the route of the proposed flight and any route along which it is reasonable to expect that the flight may be diverted.
Marking of Break-In Points 79. If areas of the fuselage suitable for break-in by rescue crews in emergency are marked on an aeroplane such areas shall be marked as shown in Figure 2-1.
Chapter 2 Page 26
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 80. The colour of the markings shall be red or yellow, and if necessary they shall be outlined in white to contrast with the background. 81. If the corner markings are more than 2 m apart, intermediate lines 9 cm x 3 cm shall be inserted so that there is no more than 2 m between adjacent marks.
FIGURE 2-1
Flight Recorders 82. Flight recorders comprise two systems, a flight data recorder (FDR) and a cockpit voice recorder (CVR).
Chapter 2 Page 27
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Flight Data Recorders 83.
Parameters to be recorded. A flight data recorder must be capable of recording: (a)
time;
(b)
altitude;
(c)
airspeed;
(d)
normal acceleration;
(e)
heading.
In addition, depending on the date of first issue of the Certificate of Airworthiness (C of A) a FDR should also be capable of recording parameters to determine pitch attitude, roll attitude, radio transmission keying and power on each engine. 84. Preservation of data. An FDR must with one exception be capable of retaining the last 25 hours of recording (usually achieved by running on a continuous 25 hour loop). The exception is the type known as Type IIA fitted on aircraft of maximum certificated take-off mass 27, 000kg or less which must be able to retain at least the last 30 minutes of recording. The operator is responsible for ensuring to the extent possible that if an aeroplane becomes involved in an accident or incident the FDR and recordings are retained in safe custody pending any accident inquiry/investigation.
Chapter 2 Page 28
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 85. Construction, location and installation. Flight data recorders must be constructed, located and installed so as to provide maximum practical protection for the recordings in order that the recorded information may be preserved, recovered and transcribed. 86. Operation. Flight recorders must not be switched off during flight time but must be deactivated on completion of flight time or following an accident or incident.
Cockpit Voice Recorders 87. Objective of cockpit voice recorder. The objective of the cockpit voice recorder is the recording of the aural environment on the flight deck during flight time. 88. Preservation of records. A cockpit voice recorder must be capable of retaining information recorded in the last 30 minutes of its operation. 89. Construction and operation. The requirements for cockpit voice recorders are as for flight data recorders.
Equipment Required on Specific Types of Aeroplanes Flights VFR Flights 90.
Chapter 2 Page 29
All aeroplanes when operated as VFR flights shall be equipped with: (a)
a magnetic compass;
(b)
an accurate time-piece indicating the time in hours, minutes and seconds;
(c)
a sensitive pressure altimeter;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (d)
an airspeed indicator, and
(e)
such additional instruments or equipment as may be prescribed by the appropriate authority.
91. In addition, those VFR flights which are operated as controlled flights shall be equipped in accordance with IFR requirements.
IFR Flights 92. All aeroplanes when operated in accordance with IFR, or when the aeroplane cannot be maintained in a desired attitude without reference to one or more flight instrument, shall be equipped with: (a)
a magnetic compass;
(b)
an accurate timepiece indicating hours, minutes, and seconds;
(c)
two sensitive pressure altimeters (not 3 pointer nor drum pointer types);
(Note. The requirements of a, b) and c) may be met by combinations of instrument or by integrated flight director systems provided that the safeguards against total failure, inherent in the three separate instruments, are retained).
Chapter 2 Page 30
(d)
airspeed indicating system with means of preventing malfunctioning due to condensation or icing;
(e)
a turn and slip indicator;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (f)
an attitude indicator (artificial horizon);
(g)
a heading indicator (directional gyroscope);
(h)
a means of indicating whether the power supply to the gyroscopic instrument is adequate;
(i)
a means of indicating in the flight crew compartment the outside air temperature;
(j)
a rate-of-climb and descent indicator.
93. All aeroplanes over 5 700 kg – Emergency power supply of electrically operated attitude indicating instruments. 94. All aeroplanes of a maximum certificated take-off mass of over 5 700 kg newly introduced into service after 1 January 1975 shall be fitted with an emergency power supply, independent of the main electrical generating system, for the purpose of operating and illuminating, for a minimum period of 30 minutes, an attitude indicating instrument (artificial horizon), clearly visible to the pilotin-command.
Operating at Night 95.
Chapter 2 Page 31
All aeroplanes, when operated at night shall be equipped with: (a)
all equipment specified under IFR Flight.
(b)
the lights required by Annex 2 for aircraft in flight or operating on the movement area of an aerodrome.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (c)
two landing lights;
(Note. Aeroplanes not certificated in accordance with Annex 8 which are equipped with a single landing light having two separately energised filaments will be considered to have complied with this requirement). (d)
illumination for all instruments and equipment that are essential for the safe operation of the aeroplane that are used by the flight crew;
(e)
lights in all passenger compartment; and
(f)
an electric torch for each crew member station.
Operating over Water - Land Planes 96. Requirement for life saving equipment. The carriage of life saving equipment is mandatory in the following cases:
Chapter 2 Page 32
(a)
Landplanes with two or more engines – when operating more than 93km (50nm) over water;
(b)
All other aeroplanes – when beyond gliding distance from land;
(c)
When taking off or landing at an aerodrome where, in the opinion of the State of the Operator, there is a likelihood of ditching in the event of a mishap occurring during take-off or approach.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 97. The equipment referred to above shall comprise one life jacket or equivalent individual floatation device for each person on board, stowed in a position easily accessible from the seat of berth of the person for whose it is provided.
All Aeroplanes on Long Range over Water Flights 98. In addition to the equipment prescribed previously the following equipment shall be installed in all aeroplanes when used over routes on which the aeroplane may be over water and at more than a distance corresponding to 120 minutes at cruising speed or 740 km (400 nm), whichever is the lesser, away from land suitable for making an emergency landing in the case of aeroplanes with 2 or more engines, and for all other aeroplanes, 30 minutes or 185 km (100 nm), whichever is the lesser: (a)
Life-saving rafts - in sufficient number to carry all persons on board, stowed so as to facilitate their ready use in emergency, provided with such life-saving equipment including means of sustaining life as is appropriate to the flight to be undertaken (e.g. food, water, protective clothing) and equipment for making the pyrotechnical distress signals described in Annex 2; and
(b)
Emergency locator Transmitter (ELT). All aeroplanes on long range over water flights must be equipped with at least two ELT(s).
99. Life Jackets. Each life jacket and equivalent individual floatation device, when carried shall be equipped with a means of electric illumination for the purpose of facilitating the location of persons.
Chapter 2 Page 33
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Flights over Designated Land Areas 100. Aeroplanes when operated across land areas which have been designated by the State concerned as areas in which search and rescue would be especially difficult, shall be equipped with such signalling devices and life-saving equipment (including means of sustaining life), as may be appropriate to the area overflown. In addition, Annex 6 requires that at least one ELT shall also be carried.
High Altitude Flights 101. An aeroplane intended to be operated with atmospheric pressures less than 700 hPa in personnel compartments shall be equipped with oxygen storage and dispensing apparatus capable of storing and dispensing oxygen as described under ‘OXYGEN SUPPLY’.
Flight in Icing Conditions 102. All aeroplanes shall be equipped with anti-icing and/or de-icing devices when operating in circumstances in which icing conditions are reported to exist or are expected to be encountered.
Pressurised Aeroplanes when Carrying Passengers – Weather Radar 103. Pressurised aeroplanes when carrying passengers should be equipped with operative weather radar whenever such aeroplanes are being operated in areas where the thunderstorms or other potentially hazardous weather conditions, regarded as detectable with airborne weather radar, may be expected to exist along the route either at night or under instrument meteorological conditions.
Chapter 2 Page 34
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations All Aeroplanes Operated above 15000m (49000 ft) - Radiation Indicator 104. All aeroplanes operated above 15,000 m (49,000 ft) shall carry equipment to measure and indicate continuously the dose rate of total cosmic radiation being received, and the cumulative dose on each flight. The display unit of the equipment shall be readily visible to a flight crew member.
All Aeroplanes Complying with the Noise Certification Standards 105.
An aeroplane shall carry a document attesting noise certification.
Note. The attestation may be contained in any document, carried on board, approved by the State of Registry.
Aeroplanes Requiring Mach Number Indicator 106. All aeroplanes with speed limitations expressed in terms of Mach number, shall be equipped with a Mach number indicator. Note. This does not preclude the use of the airspeed indicator to derive Mach number for ATS purposes.
Aeroplanes Requiring Ground Proximity Warning Systems (GPWS) 107.
Aeroplanes in the following categories are required by Annex 6 to be equipped with GPWS: (a)
Chapter 2 Page 35
Turbine-engined aeroplanes of more than 15000kg maximum certificated take-off mass or authorised to carry more than 30 passengers with a C of A issued on or after to 1 Jul 79;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (Note. Annex 6 recommends that aeroplanes with a C of A issued prior to that date should have GPWS). (b)
Turbine-engined aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of more than 5700kg or authorised to carry more than 9 passengers from 1 Jan 99;
(Note. Annex 6 recommends that this requirement should also apply to piston-engined aeroplanes meeting the same criteria). Information provided by GPWS. From 1 Jan 99, a GPWS must provide, as a minimum, warnings of the following:
Chapter 2 Page 36
(i)
excessive descent rate;
(ii)
excessive terrain closure rate;
(iii)
excessive altitude loss after take-off or go-around;
(iv)
unsafe terrain clearance while not in the landing configuration;
(v)
gear not locked down;
(vi)
flaps not in landing position;
(vii)
excessive descent below instrument glide path.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Minimum Equipment Lists (MEL) 108. Master minimum equipment list (MMEL). The organisation responsible for the type design of an aircraft in conjunction with the State of Design is responsible for the production of a master minimum equipment list (MMEL). 109. MEL. The State of the Operator should require the operator to prepare a minimum equipment list (MEL) designed to allow operation of the aircraft with systems or equipment inoperative provided an acceptable level of safety is maintained. 110. Approval of MEL. The State of the Operator should indicate, through the approval of an MEL, those systems and items of equipment that may be inoperative for certain flight conditions but not for any other than those specified. 111. Multiple MEL items inoperative. Operators must ensure that no flight is commenced with multiple MEL items inoperative without determining that any interrelationship between inoperative systems or components will not result in an unacceptable degradation in the level of safety and/or undue increase in flight crew workload. 112. Placarding. Systems or equipment accepted as inoperative for such a flight should be placarded where appropriate and all such items noted in the aircraft technical log.
Chapter 2 Page 37
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Aeroplane Communication and Navigation Equipment Communication Equipment 113.
An aeroplane shall be provided with radio communication equipment capable of: (a)
conducting two-way communication for aerodrome control purposes;
(b)
receiving meteorological information at any time during flight;
(c)
conducting two-way communication at any time during flight with at least one aeronautical station and with such other aeronautical stations and on such frequencies as may be prescribed by the appropriate authority.
114. The radio communication equipment required in accordance with the previous paragraph shall provide for communications on the aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz.
Navigation Equipment 115.
Chapter 2 Page 38
An aeroplane shall be provided with navigation equipment which will enable it to proceed: (a)
in accordance with its operational flight plan; and
(b)
in accordance with prescribed RNP types; and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (c)
in accordance with the requirements of air traffic services except when, if not so precluded by the appropriate authority, navigation for flights under the visual flight rules is accomplished by visual reference to landmarks.
116. Minimum navigation performance specification (MNPS). For flights in defined portions of airspace where, based on Regional Air Navigation Agreement, MNPS are prescribed, an aeroplane shall be provided with navigation equipment which: (a)
continuously provides indication to the flight crew of adherence to or departure from track to the required degree of accuracy at any point along that track; and
(b)
has been authorised by the State of the Operator for MNPS operations concerned.
Note. The prescribed minimum navigation performance specifications and the procedures governing their application are published in Regional Supplementary Procedures (Doc 7030). 117. Reduced vertical separation minimum (RVSM). For flights in defined portions of airspace in which, by Regional Air Navigation Agreement, a reduced vertical separation minimum of 300m (1000ft) applies above FL 290, an aeroplane must be provided with equipment which is capable of:
Chapter 2 Page 39
(a)
indicating the FL being flown;
(b)
automatically maintaining a selected FL;
(c)
providing an alert to the flight crew when a deviation occurs from the selected FL. The threshold of detection of such a deviation must not exceed 90m (300ft); and,
(d)
automatically reporting pressure altitude.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Such equipment must be authorised by the State of the Operator for operation in the airspace concerned. 118. Redundancy. The navigation equipment shall be so provided as to ensure that, in the event of the failure of one item of equipment at any stage of the flight, the remaining equipment will be sufficient to enable the aeroplane to continue in accordance with the above paragraphs. 119. Instrument Landing Systems. On flights in which it is intended to land in instrument meteorological conditions an aeroplane shall be provided with radio equipment capable receiving signals providing guidance to a point from which a visual landing can be effected. This equipment shall be capable of providing such guidance a each aerodrome at which it is intended to land in instrument meteorological conditions and at any designated alternate aerodromes. 120. The equipment installation shall be such that the failure of any single unit required for either communications or navigation purposes or both will not result in the failure of another unit required for communications or navigation purposes.
Aeroplane Maintenance Maintenance Release 121. The approved maintenance organisation is responsible for completing the required maintenance on a commercial aeroplane and indicating completion with a certificate called the ‘maintenance release’. The maintenance release is required to contain certification including:
Chapter 2 Page 40
(a)
basic details of maintenance carried out;
(b)
date such maintenance was completed;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (c)
when applicable, the identity of the approved maintenance organisation;
(d)
the identity of the person signing the release.
122. Responsibility of pilot-in-command. Annex 6 requires that a flight is not commenced until the pilot-in-command has checked that the maintenance release has been issued and that it contains all the details required.
Aeroplane Flight Crew Composition of the Flight Crew 123. The number and composition of the flight crew shall not be less than that specified in the operations manual. The flight crews shall include flight crew members in addition to the minimum numbers specified in the certificate of airworthiness of the aeroplane of the aeroplane flight manual or other document associated with the certificate of airworthiness, when necessitated by considerations related to the type of aeroplane used, the type of operation involved and the duration of flight between points where flight crews are changed. 124. Radio Operator. The flight crew shall include at least one member who holds a valid licence, issued or rendered valid by the state of Registry, authorising operation of the type of radio transmitting equipment to be used. 125. Flight Engineer. When a separate flight engineer’s station is incorporated in the design of an aeroplane, the flight crew shall include at least one flight engineer especially assigned to that station, unless the duties associated with that station can be satisfactorily performed by another flight crew member, holding a flight engineer licence, without interference with regular duties.
Chapter 2 Page 41
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 126. Flight Navigator. The flight crew shall include at least one member who hold a flight navigator licence in all operations where, as determined by the State of the Operator, navigation necessary for the safe conduct of the flight cannot be adequately accomplished by the pilots from the pilot station.
Flight Crew Member Training Programmes 127. An operator shall establish and maintain a ground and flight training programme, approved by the State of the Operator, which ensures that all flight crew members are adequately trained to perform their assigned duties. 128. The requirement for recurrent flight training in a particular type of aeroplane shall be considered fulfilled by: (a)
the use, to the extent deemed feasible by the State of the Operator, of aeroplane synthetic flight trainers approved by that State for that purpose; or
(b)
the completion within the appropriate period of the proficiency check required in that type of aeroplane.
Qualifications 129. Recent Experience – Pilot-In-Command. An operator shall not assign a pilot to act as pilot-incommand of an aeroplane unless, on the same type of aeroplane within the preceding 90 days, that pilot has made at least three take-offs and landings.
Chapter 2 Page 42
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 130. Recent Experience – Co-Pilot. An operator shall not assign a co-pilot to serve at the flight controls during take-off and landing unless, on the same type of aeroplane within the proceeding 90 days, that co-pilot has served as pilot-in-command or co-pilot at the flight controls or has otherwise demonstrated competence to act as co-pilot on a flight simulator approved for the purpose.
Pilot-In-Command Route and Airport Qualification An operator shall not utilise a pilot as pilot-in-command of an aeroplane on a route or route segment for which that pilot is not currently qualified until such pilot has complied with the following paragraphs. 131. of:
Route Knowledge. Each such pilot shall demonstrate to the operator an adequate knowledge (a)
Chapter 2 Page 43
The route to be flown, and the aerodromes which are to be used. This shall include knowledge of: (i)
the terrain and minimum safe altitudes;
(ii)
the seasonal meteorological conditions;
(iii)
the meteorological, communication and air traffic facilities, services and procedures;
(iv)
the search and rescue procedures; and
(v)
the navigational facilities and procedures, including and long-range navigation procedures, associated with the route along which the flight is to take place; and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (b)
Procedures applicable to flight paths over heavily populated areas and areas of high air traffic density, obstructions, physical layout, lighting, approach aids and arrival, departure, holding and instrument approach procedures, and applicable operating minima.
Note. The portion of the demonstration relating to arrival, departure, holding and instrument approach procedures may be accomplished in an appropriate training device which is adequate for this purpose. 132. Aerodrome knowledge. A pilot-in-command shall have made an actual approach into each aerodrome of landing on the route, accompanied by a pilot who is qualified for the aerodrome, as a member of the flight crew or as an observer on the flight deck, unless:
Chapter 2 Page 44
(c)
the approach to the aerodrome is not over difficult terrain and the instrument approach procedures and aids available are similar to those with which the pilot is familiar, and a margin to be approved by the State of the Operator is added to the normal operating minima, or there is reasonable certainty that approach and landing can be made in visual meteorological conditions; or
(d)
the descent from the initial approach altitude can be made by day in visual meteorological conditions; or
(e)
the operator qualifies the pilot-in-command to land at the aerodrome concerned by means of an adequate pictorial presentation; or
(f)
the aerodrome concerned is adjacent to another aerodrome at which the pilot-incommand is currently qualified to land.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 133. Recency. An operator shall not continue to utilise a pilot as a pilot-in-command on a route unless, with the preceding 12 months, the pilot has made at least one trip between the terminal points of that route as a pilot member of the flight crew, or as a check pilot, or as an observer on the flight deck. (Note. In the event that more than 12 months elapse in which a pilot has not made such a trip on a route in close proximity and over similar terrain, prior to again serving as a pilot-in-command on that route, that pilot must requalify in accordance with the preceeding guidelines).
Pilot Proficiency Checks 134. Requirement for 6 monthly checks. An operator shall ensure that piloting technique and the ability to execute emergency procedures is checked in such a way as to demonstrate the pilot’s competence. Where the operation may be conducted under instrument flight rules, an operator shall ensure that the pilot’s competence to comply with such rules is demonstrated to either a check pilot of the operator or to a representative of the State of the Operator. Such checks shall be performed twice within any period of one year. Any two such checks which are similar and which occur within a period of four consecutive months shall not alone satisfy this requirement. Note. Flight simulators approved by the State of the Operator may be used for those parts of the checks for which they are specifically approved.
Flight Crew Use of Correcting Lenses 135. A flight crew member assessed as fit to exercise the privileges of a licence subject to the use of suitable correcting lenses, shall have a spare set of the correcting lenses readily available when exercising those privileges.
Chapter 2 Page 45
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Manuals, Logs and Records Operations Manual 136. Annex 6 specifies the content of the Operations Manual that must be provided by the operator for the guidance of operations personnel (including crew/flight crew of a commercial aircraft). The manual must contain at least the information/instructions contained in the following list. (Candidates please note we consider the detailed sub-list at item (e) to be to long to memorise in detail for examination purposes and suggest it be regarded as general information only.) (a)
Responsibilities of personnel for the conduct of a flight including: (i)
checklists for emergency and safety equipment;
(ii)
minimum equipment list and any requirements regarding RNP airspace;
(iii)
refuelling safety precautions with passengers on board.
(b)
Accident prevention and flight safety. Details of policy and responsibilities.
(c)
Training. Details of flight and cabin crew training programmes.
(d)
Fatigue and flight time limitations. Details of rules and flight duty periods for flight and cabin crew.
(e)
Flight operations. Instructions pertaining operating matters such as: (i)
Chapter 2 Page 46
flight crew required and designation of succession of command;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Chapter 2 Page 47
(ii)
emergency and in-flight duties;
(iii)
fuel/oil calculations required including engine failure considerations;
(iv)
use of oxygen;
(v)
ground de/anti icing;
(vi)
operational flight plan specifications;
(vii)
checklists and their use, (normal, abnormal and emergency and systems information);
(viii)
standard operating procedures (SOP) for each phase of flight.
(f)
Aeroplane performance.
(g)
Route guides and charts.
(h)
Minimum flight altitudes. Method of determining the minimum flight altitude for the route flown.
(i)
Aerodrome operating minima (AOM). Details of minima to be used including after engine failure.
(j)
Search and rescue. Ground-air visual code and procedures to be followed by the pilotin-command observing an accident.
(k)
Dangerous goods. Instructions for carriage including action required in emergencies.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (l)
Navigation. List of navigation equipment to be carried including any RNP requirements.
(m)
Communications. Maintenance of radio listening watch.
(n)
Security.
(o)
Human factors.
Maintenance Release 137. A maintenance release shall contain a certification as to the satisfactory completion of maintenance work carried out in a accordance with the methods prescribed in the maintenance manual. The pilot-in-command is required to check that a certificate of maintenance release has been issued, where necessary as part of the flight preparation.
Journey Log Book 138. The Chicago Convention requires that each aircraft engaged in international air navigation must have a journey log book. The aeroplane journey logbook should contain the following items (and corresponding Roman numerals):
Chapter 2 Page 48
(i)
Aeroplane nationality and registration.
(ii)
Date.
(iii)
Names of crew members.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations (iv)
Duty assignments of crew members.
(v)
Place of departure.
(vi)
Place of arrival.
(vii)
Time of departure.
(viii)
Time of arrival.
(ix)
Hours of flight.
(x)
Nature of flight (private, aerial work, scheduled or non-scheduled).
(xi)
Incidents, observations, if any.
(xii)
Signature of person in charge.
139. Entries in the journey logbook are to be made concurrently and are to be permanent in nature. 140. The Completed journey logbook should be retained to provide a continuous record of the last six months’ operations.
Chapter 2 Page 49
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations
Records of Emergency and Survival Equipment Carried 141. Operators shall at all times have available for immediate communication to rescue coordination centres, lists containing information on the emergency and survival equipment carried on board any of their aeroplanes engaged in international air navigation. The information shall include as applicable: (a)
life rafts (number, colour and type);
(b)
pyrotechnics;
(c)
emergency medical supplies;
(d)
water supplies;
(e)
emergency portable radio equipment (type and frequencies).
Security Note. In the context of ICAO Annex 6, ‘security’ is used in the sense of prevention of illegal acts against civil aviation. 142. Security of the Flight Crew Compartment. In all aeroplanes which are equipped with a flight crew compartment door, this door should be capable of being locked from within the compartment only.
Chapter 2 Page 50
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations 143. Aeroplane Search Procedure Checklist. An operator shall ensure that there is on board a checklist of the procedures to be followed in searching for a bomb in case of suspected sabotage. The checklist shall be supported by guidance on the course to be taken should a bomb or suspicious object be found and information on the least-risk bomb location specific to the aeroplane. 144. Reporting Acts of Unlawful Interference. Following an act of unlawful interference the pilotin-command shall submit, without delay, a report of such an act to the designated local authority.
Lights To Be Displayed By Aeroplanes 145.
Terminology in relation to aircraft lights:
Angle of coverage. This is a specified angle through which an aircraft light must be visible.
Horizontal plane.
The plane containing the longitudinal axis and perpendicular to the plane of symmetry of the aeroplane.
Longitudinal axis of the aeroplane. A selected axis parallel to the direction of flight at a normal cruising speed, and passing through the centre of gravity of the aeroplane. Making way.
An aeroplane on the surface of the water is ‘making way’ when it is under way and has a velocity relative to the water. (Note, the same term is used in relation to an airship with respect to the air).
Under command. An aeroplane on the surface of the water is "under command" when it is able to execute manoeuvres as required by the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea for the purpose of avoiding other vessels. (See note above under ‘Making way’.
Chapter 2 Page 51
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Under way. An aeroplane on the surface of the water is "under way" when it is not aground or moored to the ground or to any fixed object on the land or in the water. Vertical planes. Visible.
Planes perpendicular to the horizontal plane.
Visible on a dark night with a clear atmosphere.
Navigation Lights to be Displayed in the Air 146.
Chapter 2 Page 52
As illustrated in Figure 2-2, the following unobstructed navigation lights shall be displayed. (a)
a red light projected above and below the horizontal plane through angle of coverage 110°
(b)
a green light projected above and below the horizontal plane through angle of coverage 110°
(c)
a white light projected above and below the horizontal plane rearward through angle of coverage 140°
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations FIGURE 2-2 Navigation Lights
Chapter 2 Page 53
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations Self Assessed Exercise No. 1 QUESTIONS: QUESTION 1. List the components of aerodrome operating minima for take-off and landing. QUESTION 2. List the main contents of the aircraft operating manual. QUESTION 3. Define configuration deviation list (CDL) QUESTION 4. Define decision altitude/height QUESTION 5. Define flight time QUESTION 6. Describe the difference between precision and non-precision instrument approach systems QUESTION 7. List the ICAO minima for CAT I, II, III approaches.
Chapter 2 Page 54
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations QUESTION 8. State which organisation is responsible for the MMEL. QUESTION 9. Describe the purpose of the operational flight plan. QUESTION 10. State the meaning of RNP 4. QUESTION 11. State the meaning of the term ‘Authority’ as used in ICAO Annex 6. QUESTION 12. State the main rule regarding the in-flight simulation of emergencies. QUESTION 13. List the factors to be considered in establishing minimum flight altitudes. QUESTION 14. List the factors to be taken into account in establishing aerodrome operating minima QUESTION 15. State when seatbelts must be secured by passengers.
Chapter 2 Page 55
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations QUESTION 16. List the items to be checked by the pilot-in-command prior to flight. QUESTION 17. With regard to international commercial flights, state when a take-off alternate must be selected and specified in the operational flight plan. QUESTION 18. State the maximum distance of a take-off alternate for a twin engined aeroplane. QUESTION 19. State when a destination alternate is not required by an IFR flight. QUESTION 20. State the minimum fuel reserve required at the most critical alternate by a propeller driven aeroplane. QUESTION 21. Where an isolated destination has no suitable alternate, state the minimum fuel reserve at the destination. QUESTION 22. State the minimum reserve fuel at the alternate required by a turbo-jet aeroplane.
Chapter 2 Page 56
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations QUESTION 23. State the minimum fuel required by a turbo-jet aeroplane at an isolated destination. QUESTION 24. State the precautions required to be observed when refuelling operations take place with passengers on board QUESTION 25. State the minimum amount of stored 02 required on an unpressurised aeroplane; for flight between 10,000 and 13,000ft for flight >13,000ft QUESTION 26. State when flight crew members are required to have their seat belts fastened. QUESTION 27. State when the pilot-in-command must report an aeroplane accident
Chapter 2 Page 57
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations QUESTION 28. State the minimum landing distance that must be available at the destination as a proportion of the landing distance required for: a turbo-jet aeroplane a turbo-prop aeroplane QUESTION 29. State, in which document, the MEL must be included. QUESTION 30. State the minimum requirement for the carriage of portable fire extinguishers. QUESTION 31. List the 5 basic parameters that a FDR must be capable of recording. QUESTION 32. State the length of time for which a FDR recording must be preserved. QUESTION 33. For what period of time must a cockpit voice recording be preserved. QUESTION 34. List the minimum equipment for a VFR flight.
Chapter 2 Page 58
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations QUESTION 35. When must a VFR flight carry IFR equipment. QUESTION 36. State the minimum period that an emergency power supply for the altitude indicator must be available. QUESTION 37. State when the carriage of life saving equipment by landplanes equipped with two or more engines is mandatory. QUESTION 38. When must aeroplanes with two or more engines carry life-rafts. QUESTION 39. Above what altitude must cosmic radiation monitoring equipment be carried. QUESTION 40. When must turbine-engined aeroplanes carry GPWS. QUESTION 41. Who approves the MEL.
Chapter 2 Page 59
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations QUESTION 42. State where MNPS procedures are published. QUESTION 43. State when ILS must be carried. QUESTION 44. List the contents of the certificate of maintenance release. QUESTION 45. State the minimum recency experience required to act as pilot-in-command. QUESTION 46. Commercial pilots are required to undertake proficiency checks at what intervals. QUESTION 47. List the contents of the journey log book. QUESTION 48. List the information on aeroplane emergency and survival equipment which the operator must be able to provide when required. QUESTION 49. Following an act of unlawful interference, what action must the pilot-in-command carry out.
Chapter 2 Page 60
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations QUESTION 50. Through what angle of coverage in azimuth navigation
ANSWERS: ANSWER 1. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071- Chapter 1-Para 1 Page 1-1 ANSWER 2. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-1/2 ANSWER 3. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-3 ANSWER 4. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-3
Chapter 2 Page 61
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 5. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-4 ANSWER 6. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-4 ANSWER 7. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-5 ANSWER 8. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-6 ANSWER 9. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-7
Chapter 2 Page 62
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 10. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-1-1 Page 1-7 ANSWER 11. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-1 Page 2-1 ANSWER 12. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-16 Page 2-3 ANSWER 13. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-19 Page 2-3 ANSWER 14. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-21 Page 2-4
Chapter 2 Page 63
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 15. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-24 Page 2-5 ANSWER 16. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-25 Page 2-5 ANSWER 17. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-29 Page 2-6 ANSWER 18. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-30 Page 2-6 ANSWER 19. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-33 Page 2-7
Chapter 2 Page 64
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 20. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-38 Page 2-8 ANSWER 21. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-39 Page 2-8 ANSWER 22. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-40 Page 2-9 ANSWER 23. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-41 Page 2-9 ANSWER 24. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-43/44 Page 2-10
Chapter 2 Page 65
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 25. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-45 Page 2-11 ANSWER 26. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-51 Page 2-11 ANSWER 27. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-56 Page 2-12 ANSWER 28. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-68 Page 2-15 ANSWER 29. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-70 Page 2-15
Chapter 2 Page 66
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 30. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-74 Page 2-16 ANSWER 31. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-83 Page 2-18 ANSWER 32. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-84 Page 2-19 ANSWER 33. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-88 Page 2-19 ANSWER 34. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-90 Page 2-19
Chapter 2 Page 67
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 35. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-91 Page 2-20 ANSWER 36. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-94 Page 2-20 ANSWER 37. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-96 Page 2-21 ANSWER 38. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-98 Page 2-22 ANSWER 39. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-104 Page 2-23
Chapter 2 Page 68
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 40. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-107 Page 2-23 ANSWER 41. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-110 Page 2-24 ANSWER 42. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-116 Page 2-26 ANSWER 43. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-119 Page 2-26 ANSWER 44. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-121 Page 2-27
Chapter 2 Page 69
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 45. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-129 Page 2-28 ANSWER 46. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-134 Page 2-30 ANSWER 47. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-138 Page 2-32 ANSWER 48. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-141 Page 2-33 ANSWER 49. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-144 Page 2-33
Chapter 2 Page 70
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
International Commercial Air Transport Operations ANSWER 50. JAR Ref: 071-01-01-00 071-2-146 Page 2-34
Chapter 2 Page 71
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
JAR-OPS Requirements Introduction General Requirements for Commercial Operation Information and Document Requirements Operator Certification and Supervision Requirements Operational Procedures - Operator Requirements All Weather Operations Requirements Instrument And Equipment Requirements Communication And Navigation Equipment Requirements Aeroplane Maintenance Requirements
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements
3
JAR-OPS Requirements
Introduction 1. The Civil Aviation Authorities of certain European countries have agreed common comprehensive and detailed aviation requirements, referred to as the Joint Aviation Requirements (JAR) in order to harmonise aircraft Type Certification requirements, maintenance procedures, regulation of commercial air transport operations and to facilitate the export and import of aviation products. 2. ICAO Annex 6 has been selected to provide the basic structure of JAR-OPS added to where necessary by making use of existing European regulations and the Federal aviation Requirements of the USA where acceptable. 3. JAR-OPS Part 1 prescribes requirements applicable to the operation of any civil aeroplane for the purpose of commercial air transportation by any operator whose principal place of business is in a JAA Member State. The requirements of JAR-OPS Part 1 are applicable for operators of all aeroplanes from no later than 1 October 1999. (Note. In the following notes where information is extracted from JAR-OPS 1 the JAR-OPS reference number is quoted for information only).
Chapter 3 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements
General Requirements for Commercial Operation 4.
Miscellaneous requirements prescribed in JAR-OPS 1 are:
JAR-OPS Minimum Equipment Lists - Operators Responsibilities (1.030). An operator is required to establish, for each aeroplane, a Minimum Equipment List (MEL) approved by the Authority (eg in the UK the Authority is the Civil Aviation Authority (CAA). The MEL shall be based but no less restrictive than the relevant Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL) (if this exists) produced by the organisation responsible for the type design of the aeroplane and accepted by the State of Registry.
JAR-OPS1.035 Quality System An operator shall establish one quality system and designate one quality manager to monitor compliance with, and adequacy of, procedures required to ensure safe operational practices and airworthy aeroplanes.
Chapter 3 Page 2
(a)
The quality system must include a quality assurance programme that contains procedures designed to verify that all operations are being conducted in accordance with all applicable requirements, standards and procedures.
(b)
The quality system, and the quality manager, must be acceptable to the Authority.
(c)
The quality system must be described in relevant documentation.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS1.040 Additional Crew Members An operator shall ensure that crew members who are not required flight or cabin crew members, have also been trained in, and are proficient to perform, their assigned duties.
JAR-OPS1.075 Method of Carriage of Persons No person shall be in any part of the aeroplane in flight which is not a part designed for the accommodation of persons unless temporary access has been granted by the commander to any part of the aeroplane: (a)
For the purpose of taking action necessary for the safety of the aeroplane or of any person, animal or goods therein; or
(b)
In which cargo or stores are carried, being a part which is designed to enable a person to have access thereto while the aeroplane is in flight.
.
JAR-OPS 1.100 Admission to Flight Deck An operator must ensure that no person, other than a flight crew member assigned to a flight, is admitted to, or carried in, the flight deck unless that person is:
Chapter 3 Page 3
(a)
An operating crew member;
(b)
A representative of the Authority responsible for certification, licensing or inspection if this is required for the performance of his official duties; or
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.100 Admission to Flight Deck (c)
Permitted by, and carried in accordance with instructions contained in the Operations Manual.
The commander shall ensure that: •
In the interests of safety, admission to the flight deck does not cause distraction and/or interfere with the operation of the flight; and
•
All persons carried on the flight deck are made familiar with the relevant safety procedures.
The final decision regarding the admission to the flight deck shall be the responsibility of the commander.
JAR-OPS1.105 Unauthorised Carriage An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person secretes himself or secretes cargo on board an aeroplane.
JAR-OPS1.110 Portable Electronic Devices An operator shall not permit any person to use, and take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person does use, on board an aeroplane a portable electronic device that can adversely affect the performance of the aeroplane’s systems and equipment.
Chapter 3 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS1.120 Endangering Safety An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person recklessly or negligently acts or omits to act: (a)
so as to endanger an aeroplane or person therein; or,
(b)
so as to cause or permit an aeroplane to endanger any person or property.
Information and Document Requirements 5.
Documentary requirements prescribed in JAR-OPS 1 are:
:
JAR-OPS1.125 Documents to be Carried An operator is required to ensure that the following documents or copies thereof are carried on each flight
Chapter 3 Page 5
(a)
Certificate of Registration;
(b)
Certificate of Airworthiness;
(c)
Noise certificate (if applicable);
(d)
Air Operator Certificate;
(e)
Aircraft Radio Licence; and
(f)
Third party Liability Insurance Certificate.
(g)
Each flight crew member is required to carry a valid flight crew licence and appropriate rating(s) on every flight.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.130 Carriage of Manuals An operator is required to ensure that: (a)
the current parts of the Operation Manual relevant to the duties of the crew are carried on each flight in a position easily accessible to the crew; and
(b)
The current Aeroplane Flight Manual (AFM) is carried in the aeroplane unless the Authority has accepted that the Operations Manual contains relevant information for that aeroplane.
JAR-OPS 1.135 Additional Information and Forms to be Carried An operator shall ensure that, the following information and form, relevant to the type and area of operation, are carried out on each flight:
Chapter 3 Page 6
(a)
Operational Flight Plan;
(b)
Aeroplane Technical Log;
(c)
Details of the filed ATS flight plan;
(d)
Appropriate NOTAM/AIS briefing documentation;
(e)
Appropriate meteorological information;
(f)
Mass and balance documentation;
(g)
Notification of special categories of passenger such as security personnel, if not considered as crew, handicapped persons, inadmissible passengers, deportees and persons in custody;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.135 Additional Information and Forms to be Carried (h)
Notification of special loads including dangerous goods including written information to the commander;
(i)
Current maps and charts and associated documents;
(j)
Any other documentation which may be required by the States concerned with this flight, such as cargo manifest, passenger manifest etc; and
(k)
Forms to comply with the reporting requirements of the Authority and the operator.
The Authority may permit the information detailed in sub-paragraph (a) above, or parts thereof, to be presented in a form other than on printed paper. An acceptable standard of accessibility, usability and reliability must be assured.
JAR-OPS 1.140 Information Retained on the Ground by the Operator An operator shall ensure that: (a)
(b)
At least for the duration of each flights or series of flights; (i)
information relevant to the flight and appropriate for the type of operation is preserved on the ground; and
(ii)
the information is retained until it has been duplicated at the place at which it will be stored; or, if this is impracticable,
(iii)
the same information is carried in a fireproof container in the aeroplane.
the information to be retained referred to in subparagraph (a) (i) above includes: (i)
Chapter 3 Page 7
A copy of the operational flight plan where appropriate;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.140 Information Retained on the Ground by the Operator (ii)
Copies of the relevant part(s) of the aeroplane technical log;
(iii)
Route specific NOTAM documentation if specifically edited by the operator;
(iv)
Mass and balance documentation if required (JAR-OPS 1.625 refers); and
(v)
Special loads notification.
JAR-OPS 1.145 Power to Inspect - Operators’ Responsibility An operator shall ensure that any person authorised by the Authority is permitted at any time to board and fly in any aeroplane operated in accordance with an AOC issued by that Authority and to enter and remain on the flight deck provided that the commander may refuse access to the flight deck if, in his opinion, the safety of the aeroplane would thereby be endangered.
JAR-OPS 1.150 Production of Documentation and Records The responsibilities of the operator and pilot-in command are (a)
Chapter 3 Page 8
The operator shall: (i)
give any person authorised by the Authority access to any documents and records which are related to flight operations or maintenance; and
(ii)
produce all such documents and records, when requested to do so by the Authority, within a reasonable period of time.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.150 Production of Documentation and Records (b)
the pilot-in command shall, within a reasonable time of being requested to do so by a person authorised by an Authority, produce to that person the documentation required to be carried on board.
JAR-OPS 1.155 Preservation of Documentation An operator shall ensure that: (a)
any original documentation, or copies thereof, that he is required to preserve is preserved for the required retention period even if he ceases to be the operator of the aeroplane; and
(b)
where a crew member, in respect of whom an operator has kept a record of flight times, becomes a crew member for another operator, that record is made available to the new operator.
Leasing of Aircraft (JAR-OPS 1.165) 6. An operator is permitted to operate an aeroplane(s) for the purpose of commercial air transport only under the terms of an Air Operator Certificate (AOC). The AOC holder does not have to be the owner of the aeroplanes used provided they are leased in accordance with JAR-OPS requirements.
Chapter 3 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements Terminology 7.
The principle terms used in leasing are: (a)
Dry Lease. In this case the aeroplane is operated under the AOC of the lessee.
(b)
Wet Lease. In this case the aeroplane is operated under the AOC of the lessor.
(c)
JAA Operator. This term describes an operator certificated under JAR-OPS 1 by a JAA member state.
Types of Lease 8.
9.
Leasing arrangements between JAA operators. (a)
Wet Lease-out. In this situation a JAA operator provides an aeroplane and complete crew to another JAA operator but retains all the functions and responsibilities prescribed for an AOC holder and remains the operator of the aeroplane. The prior approval of the Authority is not required in this case.
(b)
All Leases except Wet Lease-out. Prior approval by the Authority is required in all cases. Any conditions which are part of this approval must be included in the lease agreement.
Leasing between JAA and non-JAA operators. (a)
Chapter 3 Page 10
Dry Lease-in by JAA Operator. The dry lease-in must be approved by the Authority and differences from the requirements for aircraft equipment specified in JAR-OPS must be notified to and approved by the Authority.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (b)
Wet Lease-in by JAA Operator. The wet lease-in must be approved by the Authority. Furthermore, the JAA operator is required to ensure that: (i)
the safety standards of the lessor with respect to maintenance and operation are equivalent to JARs;
(ii)
the lessor holds an AOC issued by a State which is signatory to the Chicago Convention;
(iii)
the aeroplane has a standard Certificate of Authorisation issued in accordance with ICAO Annex 8.
(iv)
any JAA requirement made applicable by the Lessees’ Authority is complied with.
(Note. A JAA operator is permitted to wet lease-in without prior approval if the situation is urgent. The lessor must hold an AOC issued by a Chicago Convention State, the lease must not exceed 5 consecutive days and the Authority must be informed immediately). (c)
Dry Lease-out by JAA Operator. A JAA operator may dry lease-out an aeroplane to any operator of a Chicago Convention signatory State providing: (i)
Chapter 3 Page 11
the Authority has exempted the JAA operator from its relevant AOC responsibilities and after the Authority of the lessee has accepted responsibility for monitoring the maintenance and operation of the aeroplane, has removed it from the AOC and;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (ii) (d)
the aeroplane is maintained according to an approved maintenance programme.
Wet lease-out by JAA Operator. A JAA operator providing an aeroplane and complete crew to another non-JAA operator retaining all the functions and responsibilities as AOC holder remains the operator of the aeroplane.
Operator Certification and Supervision Requirements 10.
The JAR-OPS rules applicable to Air Operator Certification are:
JAR-OPS 1.175 General Rules for Air Operator Certification
Chapter 3 Page 12
(a)
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane for the purpose of commercial air transportation otherwise, other than under, and in accordance with, the terms and conditions of an Air Operator Certificate (AOC).
(b)
An applicant for an AOC, or variation of an AOC, shall allow the Authority to examine all safety aspects of the proposed operation.
(c)
An applicant for an AOC must: (i)
not hold an AOC issued by another Authority unless specifically approved by the Authorities concerned;
(ii)
have his principal place of business, and, if any, his registered office located in the State responsible for issuing the AOC;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.175 General Rules for Air Operator Certification (iii)
have registered the aeroplanes which are to be operated under the AOC in the State responsible for issuing the AOC; and
(iv)
satisfy the Authority that he is able to conduct safe operations.
•
that every flight is conducted in accordance with the provisions of the Operations Manual.
•
appropriate ground handling facilities are available to ensure the safe handling of its flights.
•
that its aeroplanes are equipped and its crews are qualified, as required for the area and type of operation.
•
it complies with the maintenance requirements, under the terms of its AOC.
•
the Authority is provided with a copy of the Operations Manual, and all amendments or revisions to it.
•
operational support facilities at the main operating base are maintained and are appropriate for the area and type of operation.
JAR-OPS 1.180 Issue, Variation and Validation of an AOC An operator will not be granted an AOC, or a variation to an AOC or a revalidation of an AOC unless: (a)
Chapter 3 Page 13
its aeroplanes have standard C of A issued in accordance with ICAO Annex 8 by a JAA member State
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.180 Issue, Variation and Validation of an AOC (b)
the maintenance system has been approved by the Authority;
(c)
the organisational, quality system, training and maintenance requirements can be maintained.
Operational Procedures - Operator Requirements 11.
The operators’ responsibilities are:
JAR-OPS1.195 Operational Control and Supervision An operator shall exercise operational control and establish and maintain a method of supervision of flight operations approved by the Authority.
JAR-OPS1.200 Operations Manual An operator must provide an operations manual of the approved type for the use and guidance of operations personnel.
JAR-OPS1.205 Training of Personnel An operator is responsible for training all personnel involved in ground or flight operations.
Chapter 3 Page 14
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS1.210 Standardisation of Procedures An operator is required to establish: (a)
procedures and instructions, for each aeroplane type, for the duties of ground and flight operations personnel;
(b)
a checklist system to be used by crew members for all phases of operation under, normal, abnormal and emergency conditions as applicable in accordance with the operations manual;
(Note. An operator shall not require a crew member to perform any activities during a critical phase of flight other than those required for the safe operation of the aeroplane.)
JAR-OPS1.215 Use of Air Traffic Services An operator shall ensure that Air Traffic Services are used for all flights whenever available.
JAR-OPS1.230 Use of Instrument Departure and Approach Procedures
Chapter 3 Page 15
(a)
An operator shall ensure that instrument departure and approach procedures established by the State in which the aerodrome is located are used.
(b)
Notwithstanding subparagraph (a) above, a commander may accept an ATC clearance to deviate from a published departure or arrival route, provided obstacle clearance criteria are observed and full account is taken of the operating conditions.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS1.230 Use of Instrument Departure and Approach Procedures (c)
Different procedures to those required to be used in accordance with sub-paragraph (a) above may only be implemented by an operator provided they have been approved by the State in which the aerodrome is located, if required and accepted by the Authority.
JAR-OPS 1.235 Noise Abatement Procedures An operator must establish noise abatement procedures in compliance with ICAO PANS OPS Vol 1(Doc 8168). The take-off climb procedures for noise abatement specified by an operator for any one aeroplane type should be the same for all aerodromes.
Chapter 3 Page 16
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS1.240 Routes and Areas of Operation An operator is required to ensure that operations are only conducted along such routes or within such areas for which: (a)
ground facilities and services including meteorological services, are adequate for the flight;
(b)
aeroplane performance is adequate to comply with minimum flight altitudes;
(c)
the aeroplane is suitably equipped;
(d)
appropriate maps and charts are available;
(e)
if two-engined aeroplanes are used, adequate aerodromes are available within the time/distance limitations specified in JAR-OPS;
(f)
if single engined aeroplanes are used, surfaces are available that will permit a safe forced landing to be executed.
JAR-OPS1.260 Carriage of Persons with Reduced Mobility
Chapter 3 Page 17
(a)
An operator shall establish procedures for the carriage of Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRMs).
(b)
An operator shall ensure that PRMs are not allocated, nor occupy, seats where their presence could:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS1.260 Carriage of Persons with Reduced Mobility
(c)
(i)
impede the crew in their duties;
(ii)
obstruct access to emergency equipment; or
(iii)
impede the emergency evacuation of the aeroplane.
The commander must be notified when PRMs are to be carried on board.
JAR-OPS 1.265 Carriage of inadmissible passengers, deportees or persons in custody An operator shall establish procedures for the transportation of inadmissible passengers, deportees or persons in custody to ensure the safety of the aeroplane and its occupants. The commander must be notified when such persons are to be carried on board.
JAR-OPS1.270 Stowage of baggage and cargo
Chapter 3 Page 18
(a)
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that only such hand baggage is carried into an aeroplane and taken into the passenger cabin as can be adequately and securely stowed.
(b)
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that all baggage and cargo on board, which might cause injury or damage, or obstruct aisles and exits if displaced, is placed in stowage’s designed to prevent movement.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements Appendix 1 to JAR-OPS1.270 Stowage of baggage and cargo Procedures established by an operator to ensure that hand baggage and cargo is adequately and securely stowed must take account of the following:
Chapter 3 Page 19
1.
Each item carried in a cabin must be stowed only in a location that is capable of restraining it;
2.
Mass limitations placarded on or adjacent to stowage’s must not be exceeded;
3.
Underseat stowages must not be used unless the seat is equipped with a restraint bar and the baggage is equipped with a restraint bar and the baggage is of such size that it may adequately be restrained by this equipment.
4.
Items must not be stowed in toilets or against bulkheads that are incapable of restraining articles against movement forwards, sideways or upwards and unless the bulkheads carry a placard specifying the greatest mass that may be placed there;
5.
Baggage and cargo placed in lockers must not be of such size that they prevent latched doors from being closed securely;
6.
Baggage and cargo must not be placed where it can impede access to emergency equipment; and
7.
Checks must be made before take-off, before landing, and whenever the pilot-in-command illuminates the fasten seat belts signs (or otherwise so orders) to ensure that baggage is stowed where it cannot impede evacuation from the aircraft or cause injury by falling (or other movement) as may be appropriate to the phase of flight.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements
JAR-OPS 1.280 Passenger Seating An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that passengers are seated where, in the event that an emergency evacuation is required, they may best assist and not hinder evacuation from the aeroplane.
JAR-OPS1.325 Security of passenger cabin and galley(s) (a)
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that before taxying, take-off and landing all exits and escape paths are unobstructed.
(b)
The commander shall ensure that before take-off and landing, and whenever deemed necessary in the interest of safety, all equipment and baggage is properly secured.
JAR-OPS1.335 Smoking on board The commander shall ensure that no person on board is allowed to smoke;
Chapter 3 Page 20
1.
Whenever deemed necessary in the interest of safety;
2.
While the aeroplane is on the ground unless specifically permitted in accordance with procedures defined in the Operations Manual;
3.
Outside designated smoking areas, in the aisle(s) and in the toilet(s);
4.
In cargo compartments and/or other areas where cargo is carried which is not stored in flame resistant containers or covered by flame resistant canvas; and
5.
In those areas of the cabin where oxygen is being supplied.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.355 Take-off conditions Before commencing take-off, a commander must satisfy himself that, according to the information available to him, the weather at the aerodrome and the condition of the runway intended to be used should not prevent a safe take-off and departure.
JAR-OPS1.360 Application of take-off minima Before commencing take-off, a commander must satisfy himself that the RVR or visibility in the take-off direction of the aeroplane is equal to or better than the applicable minimum.
All Weather Operations Requirements Aerodrome Operating Minima (AOM) Operators Responsibilities 12. An operator is required by JAR-OPS 1.430 to establish, for each aerodrome planned to be used, aerodrome operating minima that are not lower than the values specified in JAR-OPS. The method of determining such minima must be acceptable to the Authority and the minima must not be lower than any established by the State in which the aerodromes are located (except when specifically approved by that State.) 13. The requirements given above do not prohibit the in-flight calculation of minima for an unplanned alternate aerodrome if carried out in accordance with an accepted method.
Chapter 3 Page 21
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements Factors Considered in Calculating Minima 14. In establishing aerodrome operating minima for a particular operation the operator must take full account of:
Chapter 3 Page 22
(a)
aeroplane type, performance and handling characteristics;
(b)
flight crew composition, competence and experience;
(c)
runway dimensions and characteristics;
(d)
visual and non-visual ground aids available;
(e)
aeroplane equipment available for navigation and/or control of the flight path during take-off, approach, flare, landing, roll-out and missed approach;
(f)
obstacles in the approach, missed approach and climb-out areas;
(g)
obstacle clearance altitude/height for the instrument approach procedures;
(h)
the means available to determine/report meteorological conditions.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements Aeroplane Categories 15. The criteria taken into consideration for the classification of aeroplanes by categories is the indicated airspeed at threshold ( VAT ). This value is equal to the stalling speed ( V SO ) multiplied by 1.3 or, V S1G multiplied by 1.23, in the landing configuration at the maximum certificated landing mass. If both methods are available the higher resulting V AT must be used. Aeroplane categories are shown in Figure 3-1.
FIGURE 3-1 Aeroplane Categories
Aeroplane category
VAT
A
Less than 91 kt
B
From 91 to 120 kt
C
From 121 to 140 kt
D
From 141 to 165 kt
E
From 166 to 210 kt
Definition of Terms Used in Approach Procedures 16. Circling. The visual phase of an instrument approach to bring an aircraft into position for landing on a runway which is not suitably located for a straight-in approach. 17. Low Visibility Procedures (LVP). Procedures applied at an aerodrome for the purpose of ensuring safe operations during Category II and III approaches and Low Visibility Take-offs.
Chapter 3 Page 23
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements 18.
Low Visibility Take-off (LVTO). A take-off where the runway visual range (RVR) is <400m.
19. Flight control system. A system which includes an automatic landing system and/or a hybrid landing system. 20. Fail-Passive flight control system. A flight control system is fail passive if, in the event of a failure, there is no significant out-of-trim condition or deviation of the flight path or attitude but the landing is not completed automatically. 21. Fail-Operational flight control system. A flight control system is fail-operational if, in the event of a failure below alert height, the approach, flare and landing can be completed automatically. 22. Fail-Operational hybrid landing system. A system which consists of a primary fail-passive automatic landing system and a secondary independent guidance system enabling the pilot to complete a landing manually after failure of the primary system. (Note. A typical secondary independent guidance system consists of a head-up display providing guidance, which normally takes the form of command information, but it may alternatively be situation (or deviation) information.) 23. Visual approach. An approach when either part or all of an instrument approach procedure is not completed and the approach is executed with visual reference to the terrain. 24. Missed approach. The missed approach procedure is the procedure to be followed if the approach cannot be continued. The missed approach point in an instrument approach procedure is the point at or before which the prescribed missed approach procedure must be initiated in order to ensure that the minimum obstacle clearance is not infringed. Published missed approach procedures are normally based on a nominal gross climb gradient of 2.5%.
Chapter 3 Page 24
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements Take-Off Procedures and Minima 25. Take-off Minima. Take-off minima established by the operator must be expressed as visibility or RVR limits taking into account the relevant factors for each aerodrome and the aeroplane characteristics. Where there is a specific need to see and avoid obstacles on departure and/or forced landing, additional considerations eg cloud ceiling must also be specified. 26.
Take-off - Commander’s Responsibilities. The commander: (a)
may not commence take-off unless the weather conditions at the aerodrome of departure are equal to or better than applicable minima for landing at that aerodrome unless a suitable take-off alternate aerodrome is available;
(b)
may, when the reported meteorological visibility is below the required value or is not reported, and RVR is not available, only take-off if he can determine that the RVR/ visibility along the runway is equal to or better than the required minimum;
27. Visual reference. The take-off minima must be selected to ensure sufficient guidance to control the aeroplane in the event of both a discontinued take-off in adverse circumstances and a continued take-off after failure of the critical power unit. 28. RVR Minima - multi-engined aeroplanes. Minimum RVR values for take-off applicable to multi-engined aeroplanes which, following the failure of a critical power unit, are capable of either stopping or continuing take-off to a height above 1500ft aal whilst clearing obstacles by the required margin are: (a)
Chapter 3 Page 25
For runway equipped with edge and centreline lighting and multiple RVR information;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements
(b)
(i)
Category A,B,C aeroplanes – 150m;
(ii)
Category D aeroplanes – 200m;
For runway not equipped with lighting (applicable by day only) – 500m.
Note 1. The required RVR value must be achieved for all of the relevant RVR reporting points however, the reported RVR/visibility value representative of the initial part of the take-off run can be replaced by the pilot assessment. Note 2. For night operations at least runway edge and runway end lights are required. Note 3. JAR-OPS permits lower RVR values (125m Cat A, B, C; 150m Cat D) to be used when certain specific conditions apply eg. Low Visibility Procedures in force. 29. Aeroplanes with a lower performance capability may, in the event of a critical power unit failure need to land immediately and to see and avoid obstacles in the take-off area. These aeroplanes are required to comply with increased minima depending on the height from which the one engine inoperative net take-off flight path can be constructed.
Approach Minima 30. Non-precision approach. Approach minima consist of 3 elements, minimum descent height (MDH), visual reference and RVR. (a)
MDH. An operator must ensure that the MDH for a non-precision approach is not lower than either: (i)
Chapter 3 Page 26
the OCH/OCL for the category of aeroplane; or
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (ii) (b)
Chapter 3 Page 27
the approach system minimum. (Note. Non-precision approach system minima are not less than 250ft)
Visual reference. A pilot may not continue an approach below minimum descent altitude (MDA) or MDH unless at least one of the following visual references for the intended runway is distinctly visible and identifiable to the pilot: (i)
elements of the approach light system;
(ii)
the threshold;
(iii)
threshold markings;
(iv)
threshold lights
(v)
threshold identification lights;
(vi)
visual glide slope indicator;
(vii)
touchdown zone or touchdown zone markings;
(viii)
touchdown zone lights;
(ix)
runway edge lights; or
(x)
other visual references accepted by the Authority.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (c)
RVR. The required RVR value depends on the MDH and aeroplane category. The lowest RVR value applicable to a Cat A aeroplane with the lowest MDH value (250ft) for a runway with full lighting facilities is 800m. For the same aeroplane and MDH for a runway with no approach lighting the RVR value is 1500m. JAR-OPS contains tables of RVR values applicable for each aircraft category, MDH and runway/ approach lighting facilities.
31. Precision approach - Category I operations. A Category I operation is a precision instrument approach and landing using ILS, MLS (microwave landing system) or PAR (precision approach radar) with a decision height not lower than 200ft and an RVR not less than 550m. Approach minima consist of 3 elements, Decision Height (DH), visual reference, and RVR. (a)
(b)
Chapter 3 Page 28
Decision Height. An operator must ensure that the DH to be used for a Category I precision approach is not lower than: (i)
the minimum DH specified in the aeroplane flight manual (AFM), if stated;
(ii)
the minimum height to which the precision approach aid can be used (system minimum) without the required visual reference;
(iii)
the OCH/OCL for the category of aeroplane; or
(iv)
200ft.
Visual reference. Visual references are the same as for non-precision approaches in paragraph 29 excluding item (x).
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (c)
RVR. Minimum RVR values for Category I operations are specified in JAR-OPS based on DH value and aerodrome approach and runway lighting facilities available. For a DH of 200ft with full facilities the minimum RVR is 550m, with no lighting the value becomes 1000m.
(Note 1. Full lighting facilities comprises 720m or more of high or medium intensity approach lights, runway edge lights, threshold lights and runway end lights, which must be on.) (Note 2. For single pilot operations the operator must calculate the minimum RVR as described above except that the minimum RVR is to be not less than 800m unless the aeroplane has a suitable autopilot coupled to an ILS or MLS, in which case normal minima apply. The DH must not be less than 1.25 x the minimum use height for the autopilot.) 32. Circling Approach. The lowest minima to be used by an operator for circling are published in JAR-OPS. For a Category A aeroplane the minimum MDH is 400ft and the minimum meteorological visibility 1500m. 33. Visual Approach. An operator is not permitted by JAR-OPS to use an RVR <800m for a visual approach. 34. Conversion of reported meteorological visibility to RVR. An operator must ensure that a meteorological visibility to RVR conversion is not used for calculating, take-off minima, Category II or III minima, or when a reported RVR is available. Conversions to be used in other circumstances are shown in Figure 3-2.
Chapter 3 Page 29
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements FIGURE 3-2 Conversion of Visibility to RVR
Lighting elements in operation
RVR = Reported Met visibility x Day
Night
HI approach and runway lighting
1.5
2.0
Any type of lighting installation other than above
1.0
1.5
No lighting
1.0
Not applicable
Low Visibility Operations 35. Low visibility operations comprise take-offs when the RVR is <400m and Category II and III approaches.
General Rules for Low Visibility Operations 36. JAR-OPS (1.440) requires that an operator shall not conduct Category II or III operations unless:
Chapter 3 Page 30
(a)
each aeroplane concerned is certificated for operations with decision heights below 200ft, or no decision height, and is equipped in accordance with JAR all weather operations (AWO) requirements or an equivalent accepted by the Authority;
(b)
a suitable system for recording approach and/or automatic landing success and failure is established and maintained to monitor the overall safety of the operation;
(c)
the operations are approved by the Authority;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (d)
the flight crew consists of at least 2 pilots;
(e)
Decision Height is determined by means of a radio altimeter.
37. Take-off minima. Low visibility take-offs are not permitted when the RVR is <150m for aircraft category A, B, C and when <200m for aircraft category D unless approved by the Authority.
Aerodrome Facilities 38. An operator is required by JAR-OPS (1.445) to conduct CAT II or III operations only at aerodromes approved for such operations by the State in which the aerodrome is located. An operator is required to verify that Low Visibility Procedures (LVP) have been established and will be enforced where such operations are to be conducted.
Flight Crew - Training and Qualifications 39. An operator is required to ensure that prior to conducting Low Visibility Take-off, and CAT II and III operations: (a)
Chapter 3 Page 31
each flight crew member: (i)
has completed the training and checks required by JAR-OPS; and
(ii)
is qualified in accordance with JAR-OPS;
(b)
the training and checking of flight crew has been conducted in accordance with a detailed syllabus approved by the Authority and included in the Operations Manual;
(c)
the flight crew are qualified for the specific operation and aeroplane type.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements Operating Procedures 40. Operator’s responsibilities. An operator is required by JAR-OPS (1.455) to establish procedures and instructions to be used for Low Visibility Take-off and Cat II and III operations. These procedures must be included in the Operations Manual and must contain the duties of flight crew members during: (a)
taxying;
(b)
take-off;
(c)
approach;
(d)
flare;
(e)
landing;
(f)
roll-out;
(g)
missed approach.
41. Pilot-in command responsibilities. commander must be sure that:
Chapter 3 Page 32
Before conducting Low Visibility Operations the
(a)
the visual and non-visual facilities at the aerodrome are adequate for the operation;
(b)
appropriate LVPs are in force at the aerodrome according to information from Air Traffic Services;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (c)
flight crew members are properly qualified for the operation.
Low Visibility Operations – Minimum Equipment 42. The operator must include in the Operations Manual the minimum equipment that must be serviceable prior to conducting any low visibility procedure. The commander must be satisfied that the status of the aeroplane and its systems is appropriate for the specific operation to be conducted.
Low Visibility Approaches - Operating Minima 43. Category II operations. A Category II operation is a precision instrument approach and landing using ILS or MLS with a DH below 200ft but not lower than 100ft and an RVR not less than 300m. Approach minima consists of 3 elements, DH, visual reference and RVR. (a)
Chapter 3 Page 33
Decision Height. An operator must ensure that the DH for a Category II operation is not lower than: (i)
the minimum DH specified in the AFM, if stated;
(ii)
the minimum height to which the approach aid can be used without the required visual reference;
(iii)
the OCH/OCL for the category of aeroplane;
(iv)
the DH to which the flight crew is authorised to operate; or,
(v)
100ft.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (b)
Visual reference. A pilot may not continue an approach below the Category II decision height unless visual reference containing a segment of at least 3 consecutive lights has been attained and can be maintained. (The lights may be the centreline of the approach lights, or touchdown zone lights, or runway centreline lights, or runway edge lights, or a combination of these). A lateral element of the ground pattern such as approach lighting crossbar or, landing threshold or barrette of the touchdown zone lighting, must also be visible.
(c)
RVR. The lowest minima to be used by an operator based on calculated DH, and aeroplane category are published in JAR-OPS. The absolute minimum value of RVR is 300m.
Category III Operations 44.
Category III operations are subdivided into:
•
Category IIIA
•
Category IIIB
•
Category III operations with no decision height (formerly Cat IIIC)
45. Category IIIA operations. A CAT IIA operation is a precision instrument approach and landing using ILS or MLS with a DH lower than 100ft and an RVR not less than 200m. 46. Category IIIB operations. A CAT IIIB operation is a precision instrument approach and landing using ILS or MLS with a DH lower than 50ft, or no DH, and an RVR lower than 200m but not less than 75m.
Chapter 3 Page 34
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements 47. Calculation of decision height. For operations in which a DH is used, an operator must ensure that the DH is not lower than:
48.
(a)
the minimum DH specified in the AFM, if stated;
(b)
the minimum height to which the approach aid can be used without the required visual reference; or,
(c)
the DH to which the flight crew is authorised to operate.
Operations with no decision height. Operations with no DH may only be conducted if; (a)
the operation with no DH is authorised in the AFM;
(b)
the approach aid and the aerodrome facilities can support operations with no DH; and,
(c)
the operator has an approval for CAT III operations with no DH.
(Note. In the case of a CAT III runway, it may be assumed that operations with no DH can be supported unless specifically restricted as published in the AIP or by NOTAM.) 49. or B.
Visual reference. The required visual reference depends on whether the operation is CAT IIIA (a)
Chapter 3 Page 35
CAT IIIA. For CAT IIIA operations the required visual reference is the same as for CAT II operations.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (b)
CAT IIIB. For CAT IIIB operations with a decision height a pilot may not continue an approach below the DH unless a visual reference containing at least one centreline light is attained and can be maintained.
Note. For CAT III operations with no DH there is no requirement for visual contact with the runway prior to touchdown. 50. RVR. The RVR minima to be used in CAT III operations are published in JAR-OPS. Values of RVR minima are based on DH and flight control systems. (Note. Roll-out guidance is an essential component in CAT IIIB and CAT III with no DH operations.)
VFR Operating Minima 51.
Chapter 3 Page 36
The operator is required by JAR-OPS (1.465) to ensure that: (a)
VFR flights are conducted in accordance with the Visual Flight Rules and in accordance with the flight visibility and separation from cloud specified in Figure 3-2.
(b)
Special VFR flights are not commenced when the visibility is less than 3km and not otherwise conducted when the visibility is less than 1.5km.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements FIGURE 3-3 Minimum Visibility Criteria for VFR Operations
Airspace class
B
C
D
E
F
G
Above 900 m (3000 ft) AMSL or above 300 m (1000 ft) above terrain, whichever is the higher 1500 m horizontally 300 m (1000 ft) vertically
At and below 900 m (3000 ft) AMSL or 300 m (1000 ft) above terrain, whichever if the higher
Distance from cloud
Clear of cloud
Clear of cloud and in sight of the surface
Flight visibility
8 km at and above 3050 m (10 000 ft) AMSL (Note 5 km (Note 2) 1) 5 km below 3050 m (10 000 ft) AMSL
Note 1. When the height of the transition altitude is lower than 3050m (10 000 ft) AMSL, FL 100 should be used in lieu of 10 000 ft. Note 2. Cat A and B aeroplanes may be operated in flight visibilities down to 3000m, provided the appropriate ATS authority permits use of a flight visibility less than 5 km, and the circumstances are such, that the probability of encounters with other traffic is low, and the IAS is 140 kt or less.
Instrument And Equipment Requirements General Requirements 52. JAR-OPS required that an operator must ensure that a flight does not commence unless the instruments and equipment required under JAR-OPS are approved, properly installed and serviceable.
Chapter 3 Page 37
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements 53. In general, instruments and equipment must meet minimum performance standards as described in Joint Technical Standard Orders (JTSO) as listed in JAR-TSO. Some items of equipment are exempt from this requirement and these are listed in JAR-OPS. The requirements regarding specific items of equipment are given in the following extracts for JAR-OPS.
JAR-OPS 1.635 Circuit protection devices An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in which fuses are used unless there are spare fuses available for use in flight equal to at least 10% of the number of fuses of each rating or three of each rating whichever is the greater.
JAR-OPS 1.645 Windshield wipers An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum certificated take-off mass of more than 5700 kg unless it is equipped at each pilot station with a windshield wiper or equivalent means to maintain a clear portion of the windshield during precipitation.
JAR-OPS 1.670 Airborne weather radar equipment (a)
Chapter 3 Page 38
An operator shall not operate: (i)
a pressurised aeroplane; or
(ii)
an unpressurised aeroplane which has a maximum certificated take-off mass of more than 5700 kg; or
(iii)
an unpressurised aeroplane having a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 seats after April 1999;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.670 Airborne weather radar equipment unless it is equipped with airborne weather radar equipment whenever such an aeroplane is being operated at night or in instrument meteorological conditions in areas where thunderstorms or other potentially hazardous weather conditions, regarded as detectable with airborne weather radar, may be expected to exist along the route. (b)
For propeller driven pressurised aeroplanes having a maximum certificated take-off mass not exceeding 5700 kg with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration not exceeding 9 seats the airborne weather radar equipment may be replaced by other equipment capable of detecting thunderstorms and other potentially hazardous weather conditions, regarded as detectable with airborne weather radar equipment, subject to approval by the Authority.
54. Flight without AWR. By implication from JAR-OPS 1.670 an aeroplane which is operating by day, in VMC in areas where thunderstorms/CB clouds are not expected may operate without airborne weather radar. In addition, in the case of an unpressurised propeller-driven aeroplane with a MTOM 5700kg or less and certified seating for 9 or less passengers may carry other equipment (such as stormscope) instead of airborne weather radar.
Chapter 3 Page 39
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.685 Flight crew interphone system An operator shall not operate an aeroplane on which a flight crew of more than one is required unless it is equipped with a flight crew interphone system, including headsets and microphones, not of a handheld type for use by all members of the flight crew, except that for aeroplanes already registered in a JAA member State on 1 April 1995 and first issued with an individual certificate of airworthiness in a JAA member State or elsewhere before 1 April 1975 a flight crew interphone system is not mandatory until 1 April 2002.
JAR-OPS 1.6990 Crew Member Interphone System An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum certified take-off mass exceeding 15,000kg or having a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19 unless it is equipped with a crew member interphone system except for aeroplanes first issued with an individual certificate of airworthiness in a JAA member State or elsewhere before 1 April 1965 and already registered in a JAA member State on 1 April 1995.
JAR-OPS1.695 Public address system An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19 unless a public address system is installed. The public address system required by this paragraph must:
Chapter 3 Page 40
(a)
operate independently of the interphone systems except for handsets, headsets, microphones, selector switches and signalling devices.;
(b)
be readily accessible for immediate use from each required flight crew member station;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS1.695 Public address system (c)
for each required floor level passenger emergency exit which has an adjacent cabin crew seat, have a microphone which is readily accessible to the seated cabin crew member, except that one microphone may serve more than one exit, provided the proximity of the exits allows unassisted verbal communication between seated cabin crew members.
(d)
be capable of operation within 10 seconds by a cabin crew member at each of those stations in the compartment from which its use is accessible; and
(e)
be audible and intelligible at all passenger seats, toilets and cabin crew seats and work stations.
JAR-OPS 1.735 Internal doors and curtains An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless the following equipment is installed:
Chapter 3 Page 41
(a)
In an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19 passengers, a door between the passenger compartment and the flight deck compartment with a placard ‘crew only’ and a locking means to prevent passengers from opening it without the permission of a member of the flight crew;
(b)
A means for opening each door that separates a passenger compartment from another compartment that has emergency exit provisions. The means for opening must be readily accessible;
(c)
If it is necessary to pass through a doorway or curtain separating the passenger cabin from other areas to reach any required emergency exit from any passenger seat, the door or curtain must have a means to secure it in the open position;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.735 Internal doors and curtains (d)
A placard on each internal door or adjacent to a curtain that is the means of access to a passenger emergency exit, to indicate that it must be secured open during take-off and landing; and
(e)
A means for any member of the crew to unlock any door that is normally accessible to passengers and that can be locked by passengers.
Communication And Navigation Equipment Requirements JAR-OPS 1.845 General Introduction (a)
Chapter 3 Page 42
An operator shall ensure that flight does not commence unless the communication and navigation equipment required under this Subpart is: (i)
approved and installed in accordance with the requirements applicable to them, including the minimum performance standard and the operational and airworthiness requirements;
(ii)
Installed such that the failure of any single unit required for either communication or navigation purposes, or both, will not result in the inability to communicate and/or navigate safely on the route being flown;
(iii)
In operable condition for the kind of operation being conducted except as provided in the MEL (JAR-OPS 1.030 refers); and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.845 General Introduction (iv)
(b)
So arranged that if equipment is to be used by one flight crew member at his station during flight it must be readily operable from his station. When a single item of equipment is required to be operated by more than one flight crew member it must be installed so that the equipment is readily operable from any station at which the equipment is required to be operated.
Communication and navigation equipment minimum performance standards are those prescribed in the applicable Joint Technical Standard Orders (JTSO) as listed in JAR-TSO, unless different performance standards are prescribed in the operational or airworthiness codes.
JAR-OPS 1.850 Radio Equipment
Chapter 3 Page 43
(a)
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is equipped with radio required for this kind of operation being conducted.
(b)
Where two independent (separate and complete) radio systems are required under this Subpart, each system must have an independent antenna installation except that, where rigidly supported non-wire antennae or other antenna installations of equivalent reliability are used, only one antenna is required.
(c)
The radio communication equipment required to comply with paragraph (a) above must also provide for communication on the aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.855 Audio Selector Panel An operator shall not operate an aeroplane under IFR unless it is equipped with an audio selector panel accessible to each required flight crew member.
JAR-OPS 1.860 Radio Equipment for Operation Under VFR Over Routes Navigated by Reference to Visual Landmarks An operator shall not operate an aeroplane under VFR over routes that can be navigated by reference to visual landmarks, unless it is equipped with the radio equipment (communication and SSR) necessary under normal operating conditions to fulfil the following: (a)
Communicate with appropriate ground stations;
(b)
Communicate with appropriate ATC facilities in controlled airspace;
(c)
Receive meteorological information; and
(d)
Reply to SSR interrogations for the route flown.
JAR-OPS 1.865 Communications and Navigation Equipment for Operations Under IFR or Under VFR Over Routes not Navigated by Reference to Visual Landmarks An operator shall not operate an aeroplane under IFR, or under VFR over routes that cannot be navigated by reference to visual landmarks unless the aeroplane is equipped with radio (communication and SSR) and navigation equipment in accordance with the requirements of air traffic services in the area(s) of operation. 55.
Chapter 3 Page 44
The radio and navigation equipment specified in JAR-OPS 1.865:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements (a)
(b)
Radio Equipment: (i)
Two independent radio communications systems; and
(ii)
SSR equipment as required for the route flown.
Navigation Equipment comprising not less than: •
one VOR, ADF, DME;
•
ILS or MLS, when required for approach purposes;
•
marker beacon receiver, when required for approach purposes;
•
RNAV, when required for the route flown;
•
additional DME, where navigation is based only on DMEs’
•
additional VOR, where navigation is based only on VORs (unless otherwise authorised by the Authority); and,
•
additional ADF, where navigation is based only on NDBs (unless otherwise authorised by the Authority); Navigation equipment must comply with the Required Navigation Performance (RNP) Type for operation in the airspace concerned.
Chapter 3 Page 45
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements
Aeroplane Maintenance Requirements JAR-OPS 1.875 General (a)
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is maintained and released to service by an organisation appropriately approved/accepted in accordance with JAR-145 except that pre-flight inspections need not necessarily be carried out by the JAR-145 organisation.
(b)
This Subpart prescribes aeroplane maintenance requirements needed to comply with the operator certification requirements.
JAR-OPS 1.880 Terminology The following definitions from JAR-145 shall apply to this Subpart:
Chapter 3 Page 46
(a)
Preflight inspection – means the inspection carried out before the flight to ensure that the aeroplane is fit for the intended flight. It does not include defect rectification.
(b)
Approved standard – means a manufacturing/design/maintenance/quality standard approved by the Authority.
(c)
Approved by the Authority – means approved by the Authority directly or in accordance with a procedure approved by the Authority.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.885 Application for and Approval of the Operator’s Maintenance System (a)
For the approval of the maintenance system, an applicant for the initial issue, variation and renewal of an AOC shall submit specified documents concerning the maintenance system.
(b)
An applicant for the initial issue, variation and renewal of an AOC who meets the requirements of this Subpart of JAR-OPS, in conjunction with an appropriate JAR-145 approved/accepted maintenance organisation’s exposition, is entitled to approval of the maintenance system by the Authority.
56. The principle adopted to ensure that maintenance is carried out to an approved standard is that of ensuring that the operator is either JAR-145 approved or, is using a JAR-145 approved/ accepted maintenance organisation. Maintenance management personnel must be acceptable to the Authority and must ensure the functioning of the quality system.
JAR-OPS 1.900 Quality System (a)
(b)
Chapter 3 Page 47
For maintenance purposes, the operator’s quality system must include at least the following functions: (i)
monitoring that JAR-OPS requirements are being complied with;
(ii)
monitoring that all contracted maintenance is carried out in accordance with the contract.
Where the operator is approved in accordance with JAR-145, the quality system may be combined with that required by JAR-145.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements JAR-OPS 1.905 Operator’s Maintenance Management Exposition An operator must provide an operator’s Maintenance Management exposition containing details of the organisation structure.
JAR-OPS 1.910 Operator’s Aeroplane Maintenance Programme An operator must ensure that the aeroplane is maintained in accordance with the operator’s aeroplane maintenance programme. The programme must contain details, including frequency, of all maintenance required to be carried out.
JAR-OPS 1.930 Continued Validity of the Air Operator Certificate in Respect of the Maintenance System An operator must comply with JAR-OPS 1.175 and 1.180 (general rules for AOC certification) to ensure continued validity of the air-operator’s certificate in respect of the maintenance system.
JAR-OPS1.935 Equivalent Safety Case An operator shall not introduce alternative procedures to those prescribed in this Subpart of JAROPS unless needed and an equivalent safety case has first been approved by the Authority and supported by JAA Member Authorities. (Note. An equivalent safety case is interpreted to mean that the alternative procedure meets to an equivalent level of safety to the prescribed procedure).
Chapter 3 Page 48
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements Self Assessed Exercise No. 2 QUESTIONS: QUESTION 1. State the purpose of a quality system: QUESTION 2. State who can be carried in the flight deck: QUESTION 3. List the documents that must be carried on each flight: QUESTION 4. List the manuals that must be carried on each flight: QUESTION 5. List the additional information and forms to be carried on each flight: QUESTION 6. List the information to be retained on the ground by the operator: QUESTION 7. State the responsibility of the pilot-in-command with regard to the presentation of documents:
Chapter 3 Page 49
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 8. Define the terms ‘dry lease’ and ‘wet lease’: QUESTION 9. Describe the arrangements for wet lease – out between JAA operators: QUESTION 10. List the 3 requirements for the issue or revalidation of an AOC: QUESTION 11. State the JAR-OPS requirements concerning noise abatement procedures: QUESTION 12. List the JAR-OPS requirements which must be met before flights may be conducted along given routes or in given areas: QUESTION 13. Where may passengers with reduced mobility not be carried: QUESTION 14. State when checks of baggage stowage must be made and when access to emergency exits and escape paths must be checked:
Chapter 3 Page 50
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 15. State the responsibilities of the pilot-in-command regarding the control of smoking in flight: ALL WEATHER OPERATIONS QUESTION 16. List the factors to be considered in establishing aerodrome operating minima: QUESTION 17. State the factor used with VSO in establishing aeroplane speed related categories: QUESTION 18. List the range of speeds for each aeroplane category:
Chapter 3 Page 51
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 19. Define the following terms: Circling Low visibility procedures Low visibility take-off Flight control system Fail-Passive flight control system Fail-Operational flight control system Fail-Operational hybrid landing system Visual approach Missed approach QUESTION 20. State the gross climb gradient normally used in published missed approach procedures: QUESTION 21. State the two elements of take-off minima: QUESTION 22. State the circumstances in which a take-off may be commenced:
Chapter 3 Page 52
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 23. State the RVR minima for take-off for multi-engined aeroplanes which, following the failure of a critical power unit, are capable of stopping or continuing take-off to a height of 1500ft aal whilst clearing obstacles by the required margin: QUESTION 24. State the minimum runway lighting requirements associated with these minima: QUESTION 25. State whether the required RVR value must be applicable at one or all relevant RVR reporting points: QUESTION 26. State the minimum runway lighting required for operations at night: QUESTION 27. State the components of approach minima: QUESTION 28. State the minimum value of system minimum for a non-precision approach. QUESTION 29. List the possible sources of visual reference (9):
Chapter 3 Page 53
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 30. State the minimum RVR value permitted by JAR-OPS for a non-precision approach: QUESTION 31. State the minimum RVR and DH for a Category I operation: QUESTION 32. List the requirements that must be met before Category II and III operations may be conducted (5): QUESTION 33. State the minimum RVR under low visibility procedures in which a category A, B, C aeroplane may take-off: QUESTION 34. State where the operator must describe the procedures to be followed in low visibility operations: QUESTION 35. State the responsibility of the operator and the pilot-in-command regarding the minimum equipment required for low visibility operations:
Chapter 3 Page 54
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 36. State the JAR-OPS minima of RVR and DH for: Cat II Cat III A Cat III B Cat III ops with no DH QUESTION 37. State the minimum visual reference for a Cat II, Cat III A and Cat III B approaches: QUESTION 38. State the minimum visibility and separation from cloud for VFR in each class of airspace: QUESTION 39. State the number of space fuses that JAR-OPS require an aeroplane to carry: QUESTION 40. State the maximum Certificated Take-off mass above which windshield wipers for each pilot system are mandatory: QUESTION 41. State under what circumstances the carriage of airborne weather radar (AWR) is not mandatory:
Chapter 3 Page 55
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 42. Above what approved passenger seating capacity is a crew member interphone system and a public address system required by JAR-OPS: COMMUNICATIONS AND NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT QUESTION 43. Above what approved seating capacity must a lockable flight-deck compartment door be fitted: QUESTION 44. State the JAR-OPS requirements regarding the provision of an audio selector panel: QUESTION 45. List the minimum radio equipment that must be carried on a flight being navigated by reference to visual landmarks (4): QUESTION 46. State when additional DME, VOR or ADF equipment must be carried: QUESTION 47. List the minimum radio and navigation equipment specified in JAR-OPS for flight under IFR
Chapter 3 Page 56
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements QUESTION 48. MAINTENANCE State the JAR document which contains maintenance requirements: QUESTION 49. State whether the pre-flight inspection should include defect rectification: QUESTION 50. State the procedure concerning the use of alternative procedures to these specified in JAR 145:
Chapter 3 Page 57
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWERS: ANSWER 1. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-2 ANSWER 2. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-2 ANSWER 3. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-3 Page 3-3/4 ANSWER 4. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-4 ANSWER 5. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-4
Chapter 3 Page 58
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 6. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-5 ANSWER 7. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-6 ANSWER 8. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-6 ANSWER 9. JAR Ref:071 01 02 01 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-7 ANSWER 10. JAR Ref:071 01 02 02 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-9
Chapter 3 Page 59
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 11. JAR Ref:071 01 02 03 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-10 ANSWER 12. JAR Ref:071 01 02 03 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-11 ANSWER 13. JAR Ref:071 01 02 03 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-11 ANSWER 14. JAR Ref:071 01 02 03 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-12 ANSWER 15. JAR Ref:071 01 02 03 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-13 ALL WEATHER OPERATIONS
Chapter 3 Page 60
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 16. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-14 ANSWER 17. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-15 ANSWER 18. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-15 ANSWER 19. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-15/16 ANSWER 20. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-16
Chapter 3 Page 61
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 21. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-16 ANSWER 22. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-16 ANSWER 23. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-16/17 ANSWER 24. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-17 ANSWER 25. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-17
Chapter 3 Page 62
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 26. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-17 ANSWER 27. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-17 ANSWER 28. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-17 ANSWER 29. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-17/18 ANSWER 30. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-18
Chapter 3 Page 63
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 31. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-18 ANSWER 32. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-19 ANSWER 33. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-20 ANSWER 34. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-21 ANSWER 35. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-21
Chapter 3 Page 64
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 36. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-22 ANSWER 37. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-22/23 ANSWER 38. JAR Ref:071 01 02 04 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-25 Figure 3-3 ANSWER 39. JAR Ref:071 01 02 05 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-26 ANSWER 40. JAR Ref:071 01 02 05 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-26
Chapter 3 Page 65
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 41. JAR Ref:071 01 02 05 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-26 ANSWER 42. JAR Ref:071 01 02 05 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-27 COMMUNICATIONS AND NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT ANSWER 43. JAR Ref:071 01 02 05 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-28 ANSWER 44. JAR Ref:071 01 02 06 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-29 ANSWER 45. JAR Ref:071 01 02 06 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-30
Chapter 3 Page 66
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
JAR-OPS Requirements ANSWER 46. JAR Ref:071 01 02 06 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-30/31 ANSWER 47. JAR Ref:071 01 02 06 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-30 ANSWER 48. MAINTENANCE JAR Ref:071 01 02 07 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-31 ANSWER 49. JAR Ref:071 01 02 07 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-31 ANSWER 50. JAR Ref:071 01 02 07 Notes Ref:Chap 3 Page 3-33
Chapter 3 Page 67
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights Flight Management
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights 4
1. The planning of long range flights requires a detailed knowledge of the relevant aeronautical documention and procedures applicable to international flights. Particular attention must be given to the special considerations when planning flights over areas where navigation is difficult or where special procedures are necessary such as in polar regions or long over-water flights. Where possible routes to be flown should be selected so as to combine the need for safety, economy or minimum time, with the requirements of international regulations and controlled airspace. 2. The planning of such flights must not be undertaken lightly, and several hours should be set aside as preparation time prior to the date of the initial flight. This time should be spent reviewing the aspects of the flight in conjunction with aeronautical publications, NOTAM, arrival and departure procedures and approach plates etc. Up-to-date charts should be used on which the route(s) can be selected or drawn, navigation aids identified and adequate alternate airfields located. 3. The specific responsibilities of aircraft operators and of pilots-in-command in relation to flight preparation and management for commercial flights are described in ICAO Annex 6 and JAROPS 1.
Chapter 4 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Flight Management Navigation Planning Operator’s Responsibilities 4. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that operations are only conducted along such routes and in such areas for which:
5.
Chapter 4 Page 2
(a)
adequate ground services, including meteorological services are available;
(b)
the aeroplane performance is sufficient to comply with minimum flight altitude limitations;
(c)
the aeroplane equipment meets the minimum requirements for the operation;
(d)
appropriate maps and charts are available;
(e)
in the case of two engined aeroplanes adequate aerodromes are available within the specified time/distance limitations;
(f)
in the case of single engined aeroplanes surfaces are available which permit a safe forced landing to be executed.
The operator must also ensure that an operational flight plan is completed for each flight.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights Commander’s Responsibilities 6.
The commander may not, under JAR-OPS, commence a flight unless he is satisfied that: (a)
the aeroplane is airworthy;
(b)
the aeroplane is not operated contrary to the configuration deviation list (CDL) .
(Reminder. The CDL is a list established by the organisation responsible for the aircraft type design which identifies any external parts of the aircraft which may be missing at the start of a flight, and any associated operating limitations and performance corrections.)
Chapter 4 Page 3
(c)
the instruments and equipment required for the flight are available;
(d)
the instruments and equipment are in operable condition except as provided in the MEL;
(e)
relevant parts of the operations manual are available;
(f)
documents and forms required to be carried are on board;
(g)
current maps, data and associated documentation are available to cover the flight and any diversion that might be expected;
(h)
ground services and facilities are adequate for the flight;
(i)
the requirements for fuel, oil, oxygen, minimum safe altitudes, aerodrome operating minima and alternate aerodromes can be complied with;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights (j)
the load is properly distributed and secured;
(k)
the aeroplane performance on the flight will be in compliance with JAR-OPS requirements.
(Note. The ICAO Annex 6 requirements for flight preparation are described in Chapter 2 paragraph 25.
The Operational Flight Plan 7.
The operational flight plan contains full details of a flight and it: (a)
must be prepared for every flight and a copy filed with the operator or a designated agent or, if neither of these is available, with the aerodrome operating authority or otherwise on record at the point of departure.
(b)
must be approved and signed by the commander, and where applicable by the operations officer/flight despatcher.
8. Contents of the operational flight plan. Except for items which are available in other documentation, or from another acceptable source or, are irrelevant to the operation the following items must be included in the operational flight plan:
Chapter 4 Page 4
(1)
aeroplane registration;
(2)
aeroplane type and variant;
(3)
date of flight;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Chapter 4 Page 5
(4)
flight identification;
(5)
names of flight crew;
(6)
duties assigned to flight crew;
(7)
place of departure;
(8)
time of departure (actual off-block time and take-off time);
(9)
place of arrival (planned and actual);
(10)
time of landing (actual landing time and on-block time);
(11)
type of operation (eg. ETOPS, VFR, Ferry flight etc.);
(12)
route details (route segments, checkpoints/waypoints, tracks, distances and times);
(13)
planned cruising speeds and elapsed times (estimated and actual overhead times);
(14)
safe altitudes and minimum levels;
(15)
planned altitudes and flight levels;
(16)
fuel calculations (including record of in-flight checks);
(17)
fuel on board at engine start;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights (18)
alternate(s) for destination and if applicable, for take-off and en-route, (including aspects covered by 12, 13, 14, 15);
(19)
initial ATS flight plan clearance and re-clearance;
(20)
in-flight re-planning calculations;
(21)
relevant meteorological information.
9. The operator is responsible for ensuring that the operational flight plan and its use are described in the Operations Manual. In addition, the operator must ensure that entries in the operational flight plan are made concurrently and that they are permanent in nature.
The ATS Flight Plan 10. It is a JAR-OPS requirement that a (commercial) flight is not commenced until an ATS flight plan has been submitted, or adequate information deposited in order to permit alerting services to be activated if required. 11.
Chapter 4 Page 6
The normal time in advance of departure for filing a flight plan on the ground is 60 minutes.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Selection of Route General Criteria Applicable to Route and Aerodromes 12. The specific factors which the operator of a commercial flight must consider before conducting operations along a route are described in paragraph 4. In general the operator will be concerned with achieving the most economic or minimum time route consistent with the requirements of safety and aeroplane performance criteria, air traffic control and international rules. Aerodromes selected for destination and alternate(s) must be adequate. 13.
Adequate aerodrome. An aerodrome is described as adequate if: (a)
it is available or expected to be available (at the anticipated time of use); and,
(b)
it meets with the landing performance requirements of the aeroplane; and,
(c)
it has all the necessary facilities such as ATC, lighting, communications, meteorological services, navigation aids, rescue and fire-fighting services.
14. For the purposes of extended range twin operations (ETOPS) an adequate aerodrome must also have at least one let-down aid (ground radar would meet this requirement) for an instrument approach.
Chapter 4 Page 7
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights Route Limitations on Non-ETOPS Twin Engined Operations 15. Maximum distance from an adequate aerodrome. Unless specifically approved by the Authority (under ETOPS approval) an operator is not permitted to operate a two engined aeroplane over a route which contains a point further from an adequate aerodrome than that calculated from the maximum threshold times shown in Figure 4-1.
Chapter 4 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights FIGURE 4-1 Threshold Times
Chapter 4 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights 16. The times given in Figure 4-1 are converted to a distance, known as the ‘threshold distance’. This distance is calculated using the one engine inoperative cruise TAS assuming ISA conditions and level flight at a level that can be sustained on one engine but, not exceeding FL 170 for turbojet aeroplanes or, FL 80 for propeller driven aeroplanes. The aeroplane mass is assumed to be the that based on a take-off at maximum take-off mass (MTOM) less the fuel for the climb to optimum long range cruise altitude and all engine cruise to the threshold distance. 17. The one engine inoperative cruising speed and the threshold distance specific to an aeroplane must be included in the Operations Manual.
ETOPS Approval 18. An operator is not permitted by JAR-OPS to conduct operations beyond the threshold distance determined as in paragraphs 16/17 without ETOPS approval. And, prior to conducting an ETOPS flight an operator must ensure that a suitable ETOPS en-route alternate is available within either the approved diversion time or a diversion time based on the MEL generated serviceability status of the aeroplane, whichever is the least.
Route Limitations on Over Water Flights 19. Under JAR-OPS an aeroplane with an approved passenger seating capacity of >30 may not operate at a distance from land (which is suitable for an emergency landing) of >2hr at cruising speed or, 400nm, whichever least, unless it complies with the prescribed ditching requirements. (ICAO Annex 8 requires that on aeroplanes certificated for ditching conditions provisions must be made in the design to give maximum practicable assurance that safe evacuation from the aeroplane of passengers and crew can be executed in the case of a ditching.)
Chapter 4 Page 10
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights Route Limitations - Aeroplanes of Performance Class A (Performance class A includes all multi-engined turbojet aeroplanes and all multi-engined turbo propeller aeroplanes certificated for either 10 or more passengers or which have a MTOM >5700kg.) 20. En-route - one engine inoperative. JAR-OPS requires an operator to ensure that the one engine inoperative en-route net flight path data shown in the Aeroplane Flight Manual (AFM), appropriate to the meteorological conditions expected complies with the following limitations: (a)
the net flight path must have a positive gradient (i.e. the aeroplane possesses a positive rate of climb, typically 150fpm) at 1500ft above the aerodrome where the landing is assumed to be made after engine failure; and
(b)
the gradient of the net flight path must be positive at an altitude of at least 1000ft above all terrain and obstructions along the route within 9.3km (5nm) either side of track.
(Note. Whenever this ‘obstacle distance’ is given in the succeeding paragraphs, it can be assumed that it is automatically increased to 18.5km (10nm) where the navigation accuracy is not within the 95% containment accuracy specified for the route or area.) (c)
The net flight path must allow the aeroplane to continue flight from the cruising altitude to an aerodrome where a landing can be made clearing by at least 2000ft all terrain and obstructions within the distances specified in sub-paragraph (b). (no ‘threshold distance’ is specified for this case)
Chapter 4 Page 11
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights 21. En-route – aeroplanes with three or more engines – two engines inoperative. JAR-OPS requires that an operator must ensure that at no point along the intended track will an aeroplane having three or more engines be more than 90 minutes, at an all engines long range cruising speed in ISA and in still air, away from an aerodrome at which the performance requirements at the expected landing mass are met. 22. An exemption from this requirement is allowed by JAR-OPS if the two engine inoperative net flight path in the expected meteorological conditions permits the aeroplane to continue to an aerodrome where a landing can be made clearing en-route all terrain and obstructions within the distances specified in paragraph 20 (b) by at least 2000ft.
Route Limitations - Aeroplanes of Performance Class B (Performance class B includes all aeroplanes certificated for 9 or less passenger seats and a MTOM 5700kg or less.) 23. En-route – multi engined aeroplanes. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that the aeroplane, in the meteorological conditions expected on the flight, in the event of the failure of one engine, with the remaining engine(s) on maximum continuous power, is capable of continuing flight at or above the minimum safe altitude specified in the Operations Manual to a height of 1000ft above an aerodrome at which it can land. 24. En-route – single engined aeroplanes. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that the aeroplane, in the meteorological conditions expected for the flight, in the event of engine failure, is capable of reaching a place at a height overhead which (normally 1000ft) permits a safe forced landing to be made. For land planes, a land surface is required.
Chapter 4 Page 12
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights Route Limitations - Aeroplanes of Performance Class C (Performance class C comprises all piston engined aeroplanes which are either, certificated for 10 or more passenger seats or, which have a MTOM >5700kg.) 25. En-route – all engines operating. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that the aeroplane will, in any meteorological conditions expected on the flight, at any point on its route or diversion therefrom, be capable of a rate of climb of at least 300fpm, at the minimum safe altitude, with all engines at maximum continuous power. 26. En-route – one engine inoperative. An operator must ensure that in the event of engine failure, the aeroplane can continue with the remaining engines on maximum continuous power, to an aerodrome where a landing can be made. Obstacles within 9.3km (5nm) of track must be cleared by at least 1000ft when the rate of climb is zero or greater, (2000ft if the rate of climb is less than zero). 27. En-route – aeroplanes with 3 or more engines – two engines inoperative. An operator must ensure that at no point along the intended track, will the aeroplane be more than 90 minutes at the all engines long range cruising speed, in still air, from an aerodrome at which a landing can be made, unless:
Chapter 4 Page 13
(a)
with 2 engines inoperative it can clear obstacles within 9.3km (5nm) of track by at least 2000ft; and,
(b)
if the engines fail at the most critical point on the route, the expected mass of the aeroplane will be such that it has sufficient fuel to proceed to an aerodrome and hold overhead for at least 15 minutes at not less than 1500ft.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Practical Route Planning 28. In order to plan routes that are within the designated threshold time/distance of selected alternate aerodromes, operators make use of navigation charts on which are drawn equal time lines (isochrones) to each alternate. These equal time (circles) are typically drawn for an appropriate threshold time (eg, 60 min, 90 min, or 120 min etc.) in still air at a given TAS, lines may also be added showing the effect of a selected headwind component. 29. The planned route, or any subsequent changes from it, must always fall within one or more of the threshold time lines. The procedure is illustrated in Figure 4-2.
Chapter 4 Page 14
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights FIGURE 4-2
Chapter 4 Page 15
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Selection of Cruising Speed 30. The selected cruising speed on long range flights will normally be the speed at the appropriate cruising levels which provides the optimum range. The use of increased speed is likely to be accompanied by an increase in fuel consumption and either reduced economy and/or range. Where a higher cruise speed is required for the same route and conditions a higher fuel load will be required.
Selection of Cruising Altitude 31. The choice of cruising level may be limited by several factors. The appropriate ATS Authority for the area concerned is required to specify the minimum altitude and the operator is required to specify a cruising level at or above this figure in the Operations Manual. Air Traffic Control procedures may also limit the choice of cruising levels, for example, flight in upper airspace must be above the level published by the appropriate Authority and the use of standard IFR cruising levels is likely to apply in most areas. Certain airspace procedures may also stipulate the use of specific cruising levels, such as in the North Atlantic Organised Track System. 32. Typically, long range cruising levels will be in the band from FL290 to FL410 for turbojet aeroplanes. 33. Cruising levels in the North Atlantic Organised Track System are from FL310 to FL390 inclusive. Flights within the area known as Minimum Navigation Performance Specification (MPNS) airspace can only operate with State of Registry approval. In addition, for operations in airspace in which Reduced Vertical Separation Minima apply State of Registry approval is also required. Where this is the case the separation between same direction cruising levels can be reduced to 1000ft.
Chapter 4 Page 16
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights 34. Within the constraints described the optimum cruise altitude should normally that which combines the benefit of long range with the wind velocity. For example, where strong headwinds are expected at a particular level the selection of a lower or higher level may provide greater overall economy even though the rate of fuel consumption is higher.
Minimum Flight Altitude 35. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to establish minimum flight altitudes for all route segments to be flown. An operator is also required to establish the methods to be used to determine minimum flight altitudes; the Authority must approve each method. The operator must take into account the following factors when establishing minimum flight altitudes: (a)
navigational accuracy;
(b)
altimeter inaccuracy;
(c)
the characteristics of the terrain along routes or in areas of operation (eg. sudden changes in elevation);
(d)
probability of encountering unfavourable meteorological conditions (eg. strong downdraughts or severe turbulence);
(e)
possible chart inaccuracy.
Additional factors to be considered: temperature corrections to altimeters, ATC requirements, and any forseeable contingencies along the planned route. 36. Where the minimum flight altitudes notified by the States to be overflown are higher than those established by the operator, the higher values must be used.
Chapter 4 Page 17
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Planning Minima for Destination Aerodromes 37. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to select as a destination an aerodrome at which the appropriate weather reports or forecasts (or any combination thereof), indicate that, during a period from one hour before to one hour after ETA, the weather conditions will be at or above the specified minima of RVR/visibility and for non-precision or circling approaches, the (cloud) ceiling will be at or above MDH.
Selection of Alternate Aerodrome 38. The operator is required by JAR-OPS to specify any required alternate(s) in the operational flight plan.
Take-off Alternate 39. Requirement for a take-off alternate. JAR-OPS requires the operator to specify take-off alternate if it would not be possible for an aeroplane to return to the aerodrome of departure because of meteorological or performance reasons. 40. Location of take-off alternate – two-engined aeroplanes. The take-off alternate for a twoengined aeroplane must be within either:
Chapter 4 Page 18
(a)
one hour at the one-engine-inoperative cruising speed given in the AFM, in still air and standard conditions based on the actual take-off mass; or,
(b)
two hours or, the approved ETOPS diversion time, whichever is least, at the oneengine-inoperative cruising speed given in the AFM, in still air and standard conditions for aeroplanes and crews authorised for ETOPS.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights 41. Location of take-off alternate – three and four-engined aeroplanes. The take-off alternate for three and four-engined aeroplanes must be within 2 hours at the one-engine-inoperative cruising speed given in the AFM, in still air standard conditions based on the actual take-off mass. (Note. If the AFM does not contain a one-engine-inoperative cruising speed the speed to be used must be that achieved with remaining engine(s) set at maximum continuous power. 42. Planning minima for take-off alternate (IFR flights). An operator shall not select an aerodrome as a take-off alternate unless: (a)
the weather forecasts or reports for one hour before to one hour after the ETA at the alternate indicate that conditions will be at or above the applicable landing minima specified in accordance with JAR-OPS;
(b)
the cloud ceiling is taken into account when only non-precision and/or circling approaches are available;
(c)
any limitation related to one-engine-inoperative operations is taken into account.
Destination Alternate 43. Requirement for one destination alternate. An operator is required under JAR-OPS to select at least one destination alternate for each IFR flight unless: (a)
both: (i)
Chapter 4 Page 19
the duration of the flight from take-off to landing does not exceed 6hr; and,
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights (ii)
(b)
two separate runways are available at the destination and the meteorological conditions prevailing are such that, for the period from one hour before ETA to one hour after ETA, the approach from the relevant minimum sector altitude and the landing can be made in VMC; or,
the destination is isolated and no adequate destination alternate exists.
44. Requirement for two destination alternates. An operator must select two destination alternates when: (a)
the appropriate weather reports or forecasts for the destination for the period from one hour before, to one hour after, ETA indicate that conditions will be below the applicable planning minima; or,
(b)
no meteorological information is available.
45. Planning minima for destination alternate(s). An operator is required by JAR-OPS to select as a destination alternate an aerodrome at which the appropriate weather reports or forecasts (or any combination thereof), indicate that during a period from one hour before to one hour after ETA, the weather conditions will be at or above the following planning minima:
Chapter 4 Page 20
(a)
Cat II and III approach available – planning minima based on Cat I RVR;
(b)
Cat I approach available – planning minima based on non-precision i.e. RVR, with cloud ceiling at or above MDH;
(c)
non-precision approach available – as (b) plus 200ft and 1000m
(d)
circling approach available – planning minima as for circling.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights 46. Planning minima for en-route alternate. The planning minima for an en-route alternate are the same as for a destination alternate.
Landing Requirements Performance ‘A’ Aeroplanes 47. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that the landing mass of the aeroplane for the estimated time of landing at the destination or any alternate, permits a landing from 50ft above the threshold to full stop within: (a)
for turbo-jet aeroplanes on dry runways - 60% of the landing distance available;
(b)
for turbo-propeller aeroplanes on dry runways - 70% of the landing distance available;
(c)
for all types on wet runways – 115% of the landing distance required for dry runways
48. For instrument approaches with decision heights below 200ft the mass of the aeroplane must be calculated to allow a missed approach gradient of climb, with the critical engine failed, of 2.5%, or the published gradient, whichever is the greater.
Performance ‘B’ and ‘C’ Aeroplanes 49. The landing mass must permit a full stop landing to be made from 50ft above the threshold within 70% of the landing distance available on a dry runway at the destination and at any alternate. For wet runways the landing distance available must be 115% of the landing distance required.
Chapter 4 Page 21
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights
Minimum Time Routes 50. A minimum time route provides the shortest flight time from departure to destination whilst adhering to all ATC and airspace restrictions.
Great Circle Tracks 51. The two primary factors, which determine whether or not a route is a minimum time route are shortest distance and wind component. The basis of the minimum time route is the great circle track. On aeroplanes equipped with Flight Management Systems and EFIS, the displayed track between waypoints will be the great circle track. On navigation charts based on the Lambert Conformal and the Polar Stereographic Projections, the track can be drawn as a straight line. This track defines the shortest distance over the Earth’s surface between two points. (A disadvantage of the great circle track is that its true direction changes because of the Earth Convergency). However, the alternative and simpler rhumb line track, which maintains a constant true direction does not give the shortest distance. The angular difference (conversion angle) between the two types of track can be calculated and is illustrated at Figure 4-3.
Chapter 4 Page 22
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Navigation Requirements for Long Range Flights FIGURE 4-3 Comparison of Great Circle and Rhumb Line Tracks
(Note. The total track change due to convergency, between waypoints can also be calculated from the formula: Convergency = ch’ long x Sine Mean Latitude). 52. The use of minimum time routes is illustrated in the North Atlantic Organised Track System (OTS). Planners at the appropriate oceanic area control centre (OAC) determine the basic minimum time tracks for westbound and eastbound North Atlantic traffic taking into account the routes preferred by airlines and notified to the OAC as well as any airspace restrictions.
Chapter 4 Page 23
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures North Atlantic Operations Minimum Navigation Performance Specification (MNPS) Airspace Procedures The Organised Track System (OTS) The Polar Track Structure
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures 5
Regulatory Material 1. Regulatory material concerning transoceanic aircraft operations is contained in appropriate ICAO Regional Supplementary Procedures (Doc. 7030), ICAO Annexes and PANS/RAC (Doc. 4444). Individual States also publish relevant regulations, information/warnings and guidance in State AIPs and current NOTAM. 2. In the case of operations in the North Atlantic region, guidance is also provided in the North Atlantic MNPS Airspace Operations Manual. This document is published on behalf of the North Atlantic Systems Planning Group, which is a regional planning body operating under the auspices of ICAO. This group is responsible for developing the required procedures, services, facilities and aircraft and operator approval standards employed in the North Atlantic region.
North Atlantic Operations Characteristics of North Atlantic Region Airspace 3. The North Atlantic (NAT) region comprises in general, airspace within the FIRs of Bodo (Norway), Sondrestrom (Greenland), Reykjavic (Iceland), and the Oceanic Control Areas, Gander (Canada), New York (USA), Santa Maria (Portugal), and Shanwick (UK). The Region extends to the North Pole. A map of the area concerned is shown at Figure 5-1.
Chapter 5 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures FIGURE 5-1 North Atlantic (NAT) Region
Chapter 5 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures 4. Most of the airspace within these FIRs is high seas airspace and the Council of ICAO has resolved that rules appropriate to the high seas apply without exception, however, the responsibility for enforcement of them rests with the aircraft State of Registry. The airspace is designated in Doc. 7030 as IFR only, (Class ‘A’), at or above FL60 or 2000ft (600m) AGL, whichever is higher within New York, Gander, Shanwick, Santa Maria, Oceanic Control Areas and Sondrestrom and Reykjavik FIRs, and within Bodo Oceanic FIR when more than 100nm from the shoreline. Therefore all flights must be subject to an air traffic control service; all flights are separated from each other. Most of the airspace below FL60 is class ‘G’. The airspace between FL285 and FL420 is designated in Doc. 7030 as ‘Minimum Navigation Performance Specification’ (MNPS) Airspace.
Minimum Navigation Performance Specification (MNPS) Airspace Procedures 5. The concept of MNPS Airspace (MNPSA) is that all flights operating within it achieve the highest standards of horizontal and vertical navigation performance and accuracy for the purpose of enhancing safety whilst permitting efficient use of airspace. Formal monitoring programmes are undertaken to quantify the achieved performances and compare them with established Target Levels of Safety (TLS). 6. Aircraft operating within MNPS Airspace are required to meet a Minimum Navigation Performance Specification (MNPS) in the horizontal plane through the mandatory carriage and use of a specified level of navigation equipment which has been approved by the State of Registry or, State of the Operator, for the purpose.
Chapter 5 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Dimensions of MNPS Airspace 7. The vertical extent of MNPS Airspace is between FL285 and FL420. In terms of normal cruising levels, the practical limits are therefore FL290 to FL410 inclusive. 8. The lateral dimensions of MNPS Airspace are from latitude 27N to the North Pole, bounded in the East by the eastern boundaries of control areas Santa Maria Oceanic, Shanwick Oceanic, and Reykjavik, and in the west by the western boundary of CTA ReykjaviK, the western boundary of CTA Gander Oceanic and the western boundary of CTA New York Oceanic excluding west of 60N and south of 3830N. A map showing the extent of MNPS Airspace is at Figure 5-2. (The airspace within New York OCA to the west of 060W contains an extensive system of routes between the USA, Canada, Bermuda and the Caribbean, which known as the Western Atlantic Route System (WATRS)). 9. Within MNPS Airspace the concept of Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM) has been introduced in order to permit suitably qualified aircraft to operate with reduced vertical separation.
Chapter 5 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures FIGURE 5-2 MNPS Airspace FL 285 - FL 420
Chapter 5 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
RVSM Airspace 10. The whole of MNPS Airspace from FL310 to FL390 is designated also as RVSM airspace. Aircraft used to conduct flights within this airspace where RVSM are applied must have State of Registry approval. Such approvals are granted only after confirmation that each aircraft meets the Minimum Aircraft System Performance Specification (MASPS). When RVSM levels are used vertical separation within the altitude band concerned can be reduced to 1000ft.
Air Routes Within MNPS Airspace Organised Track System (OTS) 11. Within MNPS Airspace certain tracks are planned by the relevant Oceanic Area Control Centre (OAC) and then promulgated in a NAT Track Message on a daily basis, for use by eastbound and westbound flights across the North Atlantic. This system of tracks known as the Organised Track System (OTS) and its associated procedures is more fully described in subsequent paragraphs. Routes that are used which are not part of the OTS, are known as ‘Random Routes’.
Flights Outside the OTS 12. Flights conducted wholly or partly outside the organised tracks must be planned along great circle tracks joining significant points and flight plans are required, under ICAO procedures, to be made in accordance with the route following descriptions: (a)
Chapter 5 Page 6
flights operating between North America and Europe are considered to be operating in a predominantly east-west direction;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures (b)
flights planned between those same two continents via the North Pole are considered to be operating in a predominantly north-south direction.
Flight Plans in MNPS Airspace Significant points - Flights Operating Predominantly in an East-West Direction 13. Flights operating south of 70N. The planned tracks shall normally be defined by significant points defined by the intersection of whole or half degrees of latitude with meridians spaced at intervals of 10° of longitude from the Greenwich meridian to 070W. 14. Flights operating north of 70N. The planned tracks shall normally be defined by significant points formed by the intersection of parallels of latitude in degrees and minutes with meridians normally spaced at 20° intervals from the Greenwich meridian to 060W. 15. The distance between significant points shall, as far as possible, not exceed one hour’s flight time.
Significant Points - Flights Operating in a Predominantly North-South Direction 16. Flights whose flight paths are predominantly in a north-south direction. The planned tracks shall normally be defined by significant points formed by the intersection of whole degrees of longitude with specified parallels of latitude which are spaced at 5° intervals.
Chapter 5 Page 7
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures Indication of MNPS Approval 17. In order to signify that a flight is approved to operate in NAT MNPS Airspace, the letter ‘X’ shall be inserted, in addition to the letter ’S’ in Item 10 of the flight plan. (If the flight is approved to operate at RVSM levels a ‘W’ must be included in Item 10).
Cruising Speed 18. For turbojet aircraft within the oceanic control areas of NAT airspace, the Mach number that is planned to be used for any portion of their flight within these areas must be specified in Item 15 of the flight plan. Item 15 of the flight plan should reflect the proposed speeds in the following sequence: •
cruising TAS;
•
oceanic entry point and cruising Mach number;
•
oceanic landfall and cruising TAS.
(It is important to note the specific use of Mach number within MNPS Airspace: the Oceanic Clearance given by ATC will include the ATC approved Mach number which must not be deviated from without clearance except when necessary for safety reasons (eg. turbulence), in which case ATC must be informed as soon as possible.
Flight Plans for OTS Flights 19. If (and only if) the flight is planned to operate along the entire length of one of the organised tracks, from oceanic entry point to oceanic exit point, as detailed in the NAT Track Message, the intended organised track should be defined in Item 15 of the flight plan using the abbreviation ‘NAT’ followed by the code letter assigned to the track.
Chapter 5 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures Submission of Flight Plan 20. Flight plans for flights departing from points within adjacent regions and entering the NAT Region, without intermediate stops, should be submitted at least 3 hours before departure.
Navigation Performance Accuracy 21. Regional Supplementary Procedures specify that aircraft used to conduct operations within MNPS Airspace must meet specified levels of lateral navigation performance, one of the main requirements of which is that the standard deviation of lateral track error is less than 6.3nm (11.7km). (Note. This means that in terms of the more recent reference to Required Navigation Performance (RNP) this requirement equates to an RNP of 12.6, (in other words, for 95% of a flight, the lateral track error will not exceed 12.6nm.)
Navigation Systems Requirements 22. In the case of the North Atlantic, the navigation requirements for operations in MNPS Airspace are based on the need to achieve the required level of accuracy and, the need to carry standby equipment with comparable performance characteristics. Therefore, in order to be considered for State approval for unrestricted MNPS operations an aeroplane must meet the navigation system specification as follows: •
Two fully serviceable Long Range Navigation Systems (LRNSs). A LRNS may be one of the following: - one Inertial Navigation System (INS);
Chapter 5 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures - one Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS); or, - one navigation system using the inputs from one or more Inertial Reference System (IRS) or any other sensor system complying with MNPS requirements. •
Each LRNS must be capable of providing to the flight crew a continuous indication of the aircraft position relative to desired track.
•
It is also desirable that the navigation system employed for the provision of steering guidance is capable of being coupled to the autopilot.
(Note aircraft which do not have MNPS approval or are unable to meet the MNPS requirements should plan to operate outside (including above or below) designated MNPS airspace).
Monitoring Navigation System Accuracy 23. Avoidance of Gross Navigation Errors (GNE). A Gross Navigation Error is defined as a deviation from cleared track (course) of 25nm or more. Thorough navigation and cross checking procedures are required in order to minimise occurrences of GNE. These errors are normally detected by long range radars as aircraft leave oceanic airspace, or through the scrutiny of routine position reports. 24. Three independent systems. Normally, such navigation systems include comparator and/or warning devices, but it is still necessary for the crew to make frequent comparison checks. When an installation includes three independent systems, a comparison between outputs should easily reveal the faulty system. 25. Two independent systems. When only two systems are provided the identification of a defective system is likely to be more difficult. If such a situation arises in oceanic airspace any or all of the following actions should be considered:
Chapter 5 Page 10
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures (a)
checking malfunction codes for indication of unserviceability;
(a)
obtaining a fix. It may be possible to use: (i)
the weather radar (range marks and relative bearing lines) to determine the position relative to an identifiable landmark; or,
(ii)
the ADF to obtain bearings from a suitable NDB, (using the variation at the aircraft to convert magnetic bearings to true); or,
(iii)
if within range, a VOR, in which case the magnetic variation at the VOR location should be used to convert the radial to a true bearing (except when flying in the Canadian Northern Domestic Airspace where VOR bearings may be oriented with reference to true as opposed to magnetic north). (When simultaneous DME ranging is also available navigation errors should be resolved rapidly).
(b)
contacting a nearby aircraft on VHF, and comparing information on spot wind, or ground speed and drift.
(c)
if such assistance is not available, and as a last resort, the flight plan wind velocity for the current DR position of the aircraft, can be compared with the navigation system outputs.
26. Interpretation of fixing. In addition to the obvious use of establishing position, a series of at least two fixes can also be used to determine the track made good, ground speed and, if the average heading and TAS are known, the wind velocity.
Chapter 5 Page 11
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Separation of Aircraft 27. Separation between aircraft in NAT Region (MNPS) airspace is achieved by means of lateral separation, longitudinal separation (using the ‘Mach Number Technique’) and vertical separation, this is known as composite separation.
Lateral Separation 28.
Minimum lateral separation in the NAT Region defined in Doc.7030 is: (a)
60nm between aircraft which meet MNPS requirements where a portion of the route is within, above or below MNPS Airspace;
(b)
120nm between other aircraft.
Longitudinal Separation 29. Mach Number Technique. In this technique subsonic turbojet aircraft operating successively along suitable routes are cleared by ATC to maintain appropriate Mach Numbers for a relevant portion of the en-route phase of their flight. The principle of this procedure is that where successive aircraft are maintaining the same Mach number their longitudinal separation will be maintained with only minor variations over long periods. The technique requires that aircraft adhere rigidly to their approved Mach number and in addition make accurate position reports based on an accurate time reference. Pilots intending to operate in MNPS Airspace are required therefore to use accurate clocks and obtain a time check against a standard time signal, based on UTC, before entering MNPS Airspace.
Chapter 5 Page 12
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures 30. Minimum separation between subsonic turbojet aircraft meeting the MNPS requirements when a portion of the route is within, above or below MNPS Airspace is: (a)
10 minutes providing the (same) Mach number technique is applied whether in level, climbing or descending flight and the aircraft concerned have reported over a common reporting point and follow the same or a continuously diverging track;
(b)
between 10 and 5 minutes inclusive, only when it is possible to ensure, by radar or other means approved by the State, that the required time interval exists and will continue to exist at the common point, providing the preceding aircraft is maintaining a greater Mach number than the following aircraft (the length of the specified time interval depends on the difference between the aircraft speeds, for example, 9 min if preceding aircraft is MO.02 faster, or 5 min when preceding aircraft is MO.06 faster than the following aircraft);
(c)
In other cases, 15 minutes
Step Climb Procedure 31. The application of longitudinal separation between aircraft carrying out climb/descents enroute and other aircraft operating in the same direction shall be maintained throughout the climb/ descent and at the new level, unless lateral separation is provided. When Mach Number technique is being used the clearance to climb/descend will be based on the assumption that the last assigned Mach Number is maintained. If this is not feasible ATC must be informed at the time of the climb/ descent request.
Chapter 5 Page 13
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
ATC Clearances in MNPS Airspace 32. Standard ATC procedures are applied in MNPS Airspace however, an abbreviated clearance may be used only when clearing an aircraft to follow one of the organised tracks throughout its flight within NAT control areas or, along one of the Polar Tracks (described later) or, when clearing an aircraft to follow its flight planned route. Clearances to climb or descend maintaining own separation in VMC is not to be granted. 33. When an abbreviated clearance is issued to follow one of the organised tracks or a Polar Track it will include: (a)
cleared track specified by track code;
(b)
cleared flight level(s);
(c)
cleared Mach Number (if required);
(d)
if the aircraft is designated to send meteorological information in flight, the phrase ‘send met reports’.
34. Read Back. Pilots are required to read back the contents of the clearance message. In addition when cleared to follow an organised track, unless alternative procedures are approved, the pilot is required to read back full details of the track specified by the code letter. Where the term ‘cleared via flight planned route’ is used the pilot shall read back full details of the flight plan route. 35. Change of ETA. After obtaining a clearance for oceanic entry, if the forward estimate for the oceanic entry point changes by 3 minutes or more the pilot must pass a revised estimate to ATC as soon as possible. This principle applies also to any forward estimate included in a position report.
Chapter 5 Page 14
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Position Reporting in MNPS Airspace 36. Unless otherwise required by ATS, position reports for flights on routes not defined by designated reporting points must be made at significant points listed in the flight plan. 37. East-West Flights. ATS may require any flight operating in a predominantly east-west direction to report its position at any of the intermediate meridians spaced at intervals of: (a)
10° of longitude south of 70N (between 005W and 065W);
(b)
20° of longitude north of 70N (between 010W and 050W).
38. North-South Flights. ATS may require any flight operating generally in a north-south direction to report its position at any intermediate parallel of latitude when deemed necessary. 39. In requiring aircraft to report their position at intermediate intervals, the ATS authorities will be guided by the requirement to have position information at approximately hourly intervals.
Content of Position Reports 40. Verbal position reports are identified by the spoken word ‘Position’ transmitted immediately before or after the aircraft identification. Outside ATS routes, position is to be expressed in terms of latitude and longitude. For flights predominantly east-west, latitude is expressed in degrees and minutes and longitude in degrees only. For flights that are predominantly north-south, latitude is expressed in degrees and longitude in degrees and minutes. 41.
Chapter 5 Page 15
Time in position reports is to be expressed using four digits, giving hour and minutes.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures Copying Position Reports to Adjacent OCAs 42. When aircraft are operating within 60nm or less of a common boundary with an adjacent OCA, including aircraft operating on tracks through successive points on such a boundary, position reports must also be made to the adjacent area control centre. Responsibility for the transmission of reports to the adjacent ATS units may be delegated to the appropriate communications station by local arrangement.
Meteorological Reports 43. From among the aircraft intending to operate on organised tracks, oceanic control centres will designate those flights which are required to make routine meteorological observations at each prescribed reporting point. The designation will be made by the oceanic area control centre delivering the clearance using the phrase ‘Send Met Reports’ and should be made so as to designate one aircraft per track, at hourly intervals. 44.
Chapter 5 Page 16
The content of the routine ‘met report’ element of a position report is: (a)
Air temperature
(b)
Wind direction
(c)
Wind speed
(d)
Turbulence
(e)
Aircraft icing
(f)
Humidity (if available)
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Contingency Procedures - Aircraft Unable to Continue in Accordance with ATC Clearance 45. Regional Supplementary Procedures for the NAT region provide guidance on the procedures to be followed if an aircraft is unable to continue the flight in accordance with its ATC clearance. The situations covered are: (a)
inability to maintain assigned level due to adverse weather, aircraft performance, pressurisation failure (and problems associated with high-level supersonic flight;
(b)
loss of or, significant reduction in, the navigation capability when operating in parts of the airspace where a high accuracy of navigation is required; and,
(c)
en-route diversion across the prevailing NAT flow.
General Procedures 46. Request for ATC clearance. If an aircraft is unable to continue flight in accordance with its ATC clearance, a revised clearance must be obtained prior to initiating any action. This procedure also applies when an aircraft is unable to maintain an accuracy of navigation on which the separation minima applied by ATC between it and adjacent aircraft depends. The request for a revised clearance must be made using the RT distress or urgency signal as appropriate. Subsequent ATC action will depend on the intentions of the pilot and the overall air traffic situation. 47. Aircraft unable to obtain prior clearance. If prior clearance cannot be obtained, ATC clearance must be obtained as soon as possible and in the meantime, the pilot must:
Chapter 5 Page 17
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
48.
Chapter 5 Page 18
(a)
broadcast position (including ATS route designator or the track code, as appropriate) and intentions on 121.5MHz at suitable intervals until ATC clearance is obtained;
(b)
make maximum use of lights to make the aircraft more visible;
(c)
maintain watch for conflicting traffic; and,
(d)
initiate such action as necessary to ensure safety of the aircraft.
Recommended procedure – aircraft unable to obtain revised ATC clearance. (a)
Initial action. If unable to obtain ATC clearance, the aircraft should leave its assigned route or track by turning 90 degrees to the right or left, whenever this is possible. The direction of the turn should be based on the position of the aircraft relative to any adjacent tracks but other factors such as the direction to an alternate aerodrome, terrain clearance and the levels assigned to adjacent tracks may also be relevant.
(b)
Subsequent action: •
aircraft able to maintain assigned flight level should:
(i)
turn to acquire and maintain in either direction a track laterally separated by 30nm from its assigned route or track; and,
(ii)
if above FL410, climb or descend 1000ft; or,
(iii)
if below FL410, climb or descend 500ft; or,
(iv)
if at FL410, climb 1000ft or descend 500ft.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures •
aircraft unable to maintain assigned cruising level should:
(i)
initially, minimise descent rate to the extent feasible;
(ii)
turn while descending to acquire and maintain in either direction a track which is laterally separated by 30nm from its assigned route or track; and,
(iii)
for the subsequent level, a level should be selected which differs from those normally used by 1000ft if above FL410 or by 500ft if below FL410.
En-Route Diversion Across the Prevailing NAT Traffic Flow 49. The basic concept of the guidance provided by Doc.7030 is that, when operationally feasible, before diverting across tracks or routes carrying heavy traffic, the aircraft should offset from the assigned route or track by 30nm and expedite a descent to an altitude below or, a climb to an altitude above, those where the vast majority of NAT traffic operate, before proceeding towards the alternate aerodrome. The specific actions in the event of an aircraft needing to make such a diversion when prior ATC clearance cannot be obtained depend on whether the aircraft is able to maintain its assigned flight level.
Diversion – Aircraft Able to Maintain Assigned Level 50.
An aircraft, which is able to maintain its assigned level, should: (a)
Chapter 5 Page 19
turn towards the alternate aerodrome to acquire a track which is separated laterally by 30nm from the assigned route or track; and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures (b)
if above FL410, climb or descend 1000ft; or,
(c)
if below FL410, climb or descend 500ft; or,
(d)
if at FL410, climb 1000ft or descend 500ft; and,
(e)
when on the offset track, expedite a descent to an altitude below FL285 or, a climb to an altitude above FL410; and,
(f)
when at or below FL285 or above FL410, proceed towards the alternate aerodrome while maintaining a level which differs from those normally used by 500ft if below FL410 or 1000ft if above FL410; or,
(g)
if unable or unwilling to make a major climb or descent, fly an altitude offset for the diversion until obtaining an ATC clearance.
Diversion – Aircraft Unable to Maintain Assigned Level 51.
Chapter 5 Page 20
An aircraft not able to maintain its assigned level should: (a)
initially minimise its descent rate to the extent that is operationally feasible; and,
(b)
start its descent while turning to acquire a track separated laterally by 30nm from its assigned route or track; and,
(c)
unless circumstances dictate otherwise, maintain the offset track while expediting a descent to below FL285; and,
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures (d)
unless circumstances dictate otherwise, when below FL285, proceed towards the alternate aerodrome; and
(e)
continue a descent to a level which can be maintained and which differs from those normally used, by 500ft, if below FL410.
(Note. ATC must be advised of the actions taken where possible, however, the specific guidance in Doc.7030 is that when a twin-engined aircraft is involved in such procedures as a result of the shutdown of a power unit or a primary system failure, ATC should be advised of the aircraft type and the need for expeditious handling.)
Communications Procedures in MNPS Airspace 52. Most NAT air/ground communications are conducted on single side-band HF frequencies and aircraft intending to operate in the Shanwick OCA must be capable of maintaining direct two-way communication on appropriate frequencies. Pilots communicate with OACs via aeradio stations staffed by communicators who have no executive ATC authority and messages are relayed from the ground station to the relevant OAC for action. Aeradio stations and OACs are not necessarily co-located. 53. Aircraft with only VHF communications equipment should plan their route outside the Shanwick OCA and ensure that they remain within VHF coverage of appropriate ground stations.
Chapter 5 Page 21
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures 54. Aeradio stations are also responsible for the operation of general purpose (GP) VHF outlets. These stations are valuable in the vicinity of Iceland, Faeroes and Greenland since VHF is not as susceptible to sunspot activity as HF. As with HF communications contact on VHF is also with an aeradio station radio operator and not directly with ATC but, direct controller/pilot communications (DCPC) can be arranged on some frequencies.
SELCAL Operation 55. The requirement for maintaining a continuous listening watch on assigned HF frequency is not mandatory if a SELCAL watch is maintained and correct operation is ensured. Correct SELCAL operation is ensured by: (a)
the inclusion of the SELCAL code in the flight plan;
(b)
the issue of a correction to the SELCAL code if subsequently altered due to change of aircraft or equipment; and,
(c)
an operational check of the SELCAL equipment with the appropriate radio station at or before initial entry into oceanic airspace. This SELCAL check must be completed before commencing SELCAL watch.
(Note. ICAO Doc. 7030 recommends that SELCAL watch on the assigned radio frequency should be maintained, even in areas of the region where VHF coverage is available and used for air/ground communications.)
Chapter 5 Page 22
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures VHF Guard 56. Pilots operating in the NAT Region are required to monitor continuously the VHF emergency frequency 121.5MHz except when communicating on other frequencies or when airborne equipment or cockpit duties do not permit the simultaneous guarding of two channels.
Air-to-Air Communications 57. Should air-to-air communication be necessary, for example to arrange for the relaying of a position report after failure of HF communications, it is recommended that initial contact is made on 121.5MHz before exchanging messages on frequency 131.8MHz (Note, this frequency is reserved for air-to-air communications and the MNPS Operations Manual recommends that aircraft monitor this frequency also, when flying in NAT airspace).
Radio Failure Procedures HF Communications Failure 58. In the event of being unable to make position reports to ATC on any allocated HF frequencies, pilots should make every effort to relay such reports via other aircraft, using the air-toair procedure described in the previous paragraph. If other ATC facilities are thought to be within VHF range an attempt should be made to advise them of the failure and request relay to the ATC facility with whom communications are intended. 59. Radio failure procedures in MNPS Airspace described in Doc.7030 depend on whether the failure occurs before entering or while operating within the NAT Region.
Chapter 5 Page 23
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures Communications Failure Prior to Entering NAT Region 60. The MNPS Operations Manual recommends that pilots experiencing radio failure whilst flying in domestic airspace should not enter the OCA but adopt the appropriate domestic communications failure procedure and land at a suitable airport. However, if the pilot elects to continue, then to allow ATC to provide adequate separation, one of the following procedures should be followed: (a)
if operating with a received and acknowledged Oceanic Clearance aircraft with radio failure should enter oceanic airspace at the cleared level and speed at the cleared oceanic entry point and proceed in accordance with the clearance.
(Any speed or level adjustments required to comply with the clearance must be completed within the vicinity of the oceanic entry point). (b)
If operating without a received and acknowledged Oceanic Clearance, enter oceanic airspace at the first oceanic entry point, level and speed as contained in the filed flight plan and proceed in accordance with the flight plan to route to landfall. That first oceanic level and speed must be maintained to landfall.
Communications Failure Prior to Exiting NAT Region 61. Aircraft cleared by ATC on flight planned route. The aircraft must proceed in accordance with the last received and acknowledged Oceanic Clearance, including level and speed, to the last specified oceanic route point, normally landfall. Then, continue on the filed flight plan route. Maintain the last assigned oceanic level and speed to landfall and after passing the last specified oceanic route point conform to relevant State procedures/regulations.
Chapter 5 Page 24
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures 62. Aircraft cleared by ATC on other than filed flight plan route. Aircraft must proceed in accordance with the last received and acknowledged Oceanic Clearance, including level and speed, to the last specified oceanic route point, normally landfall. After passing this point conform to relevant State procedures/regulations and rejoin the filed flight plan route, proceeding if possible via the published ATS route structure to the next significant route point on the flight plan.
SSR Procedures 63. Unless otherwise directed by ATC, pilots of aircraft equipped with SSR shall retain the last assigned Mode A (identity) code for a period of 30 minutes after entry into NAT Airspace and operate the SSR transponder on Mode A code 2000 after this time. (Note. The requirement for the continuous operation of Mode C or the use of SSR special purpose codes 7500, 7600, and 7700 are unaffected by this requirement).
Navigation System Failure Procedures 64. Some aircraft are equipped with triplex (3) Long Range Navigation Systems (LRNS) and failure of one system means that MNPS requirements are still met. The following procedures are applicable to aircraft fitted with only two LRNS. 65. Failure of one Long Range Navigation System (LRNS) before reaching (MNPS Airspace)/ OCA boundary. The pilot must consider: (a)
Chapter 5 Page 25
landing at a suitable aerodrome before the boundary or returning to the aerodrome of departure;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures (b)
diverting to a special contingency route (these routes called ‘Blue Spruce Routes’ are published for use by aircraft suffering partial loss of navigation capability and follow closer to land and short range navigation aids);
(c)
obtain a re-clearance below MNPS levels.
66. Failure of one LRNS after the OCA boundary is crossed. Once the aircraft has entered oceanic airspace, the pilot should normally continue to operate the aircraft in accordance with the Oceanic Clearance already received however, the pilot should:
67.
Chapter 5 Page 26
(a)
assess the aircraft’s remaining navigation performance and try to obtain ATC clearance for an appropriate course of action such as, turn-back, flight above or below MNPS Airspace, or use of a special route;
(b)
continue to monitor the performance of the remaining navigation system, for example by comparison of compass systems (main and standby), position of other aircraft (from contrails), and if doubt exists, by comparing wind and track details with aircraft that should be following the same track.
Failure of remaining LRNS after entering MNPS Airspace. The pilot should: (a)
notify ATC immediately;
(b)
make the best use of the comparison procedures in the preceding paragraph;
(c)
keep a look-out for possible conflicting aircraft, and make maximum use of external lights;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures (d)
if no instructions are received from ATC within a reasonable time consider climbing or descending 500ft, broadcasting action taken on 121.5MHz and advising ATC as soon as possible.
(Note. These procedures should also be followed if when the remaining system gives an indication of degradation of performance, or neither system fails completely but, the system indications diverge widely and the defective system cannot be determined.) 68. Procedure recommended to minimise the effect of a total navigation computer system failure. If the computer system fails and steering guidance is not available but the basic outputs of latitude and longitude, drift, and groundspeed remain usable the pilot should consider plotting the navigation parameters on a suitable chart. The type of actions to follow are:
Chapter 5 Page 27
(a)
draw the cleared route on a suitable chart, extracting mean true tracks between waypoints;
(b)
use basic IRS/GPS outputs to adjust heading to maintain track and to calculate ETAs;
(c)
at intervals of not more than 15 minutes plot positions on the chart and adjust heading to regain track.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
The Organised Track System (OTS) 69. As a result of passenger demands, time zone differences and airport noise restrictions, much of the North Atlantic air traffic contributes to one of two flows; a westbound flow departing Europe in the morning, and an eastbound flow departing North America in the evening. The effect of these flows is to concentrate most of the traffic undirectionally, peak westbound traffic occurring between 1130UTC and 1800UTC, peak eastbound traffic between 0100UTC and 0800UTC, at 030°W. (This longitude is the common reference point for OTS/MNPS timing). 70. Because of the constraints of large horizontal separation criteria and a limited economical height band (FL 310 – 390) the airspace is very congested at peak hours. In order to provide the best service to the bulk of the traffic, a system of organised tracks is constructed every 12 hours to accommodate as many aircraft as possible on or close to their minimum time tracks. 71. Airspace utilisation is improved by the use of RVSM procedures. The application of ‘Mach Number Technique’ permits further improvement of utilisation along tracks and help to facilitate en route step-climbs. 72. Because of the energetic nature of North Atlantic weather systems, including jet streams, eastbound and westbound minimum time tracks are seldom identical. The creation of a different organised track system is therefore necessary every 12 hours.
Chapter 5 Page 28
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Construction of the Organised Track System 73. After determination of basic minimum time tracks, with due consideration of airlines’ preferred routes and taking into account airspace restrictions such as Danger Areas and military airspace reservations, the organised track system is constructed by the appropriate Oceanic Area Control Centre (OAC). The night-time OTS is constructed by Gander OAC and the day-time OTS, by Shanwick OAC (Prestwick), each taking into account tracks which New York, Reykjavik, Bodo and/or Santa Maria OACs may require in their Oceanic Control Areas (OCAs). In each case OAC planners consult each other and co-ordinate with adjacent OACs and domestic ATC agencies to ensure that the proposed system is viable. They also take into account the anticipated requirements of opposite direction traffic and ensure that sufficient track/flight level profiles are provided to satisfy anticipated traffic demand. The impact on domestic route structures and the serviceability of transition area radars and navaids are checked before the system is finalised. 74. When the expected traffic level justifies it, tracks are established to cater for Europe Caribbean routing. Extra care is required when planning on these routes as they differ slightly form the ‘core tracks’ in that they may cross, and in some cases may not extend from coast out to coast in (necessitating random routing to join or leave). Similarly, tracks may commence at 030ºW north of 61º N to cater for NAT traffic routing via Reykjavik OCA and northern Canada. 75. The agreed organised track system is then promulgated as the NAT Track Message via the Aeronautical Fixed Telecommunication Network (AFTN) to all interested addressees. A typical time of publication of the daytime OTS is 0000UTC and of the night-time OTS is 1200UTC. Examples of both systems showing track and flight level availability are given in Figure 5-3, Figure 5-4, Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.
Chapter 5 Page 29
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Planning and Selection of Route 76. It should be appreciated that the use of OTS tracks is not mandatory. Aircraft may fly on random routes which remain clear of the OTS, or may fly on any route that leaves or joins the outer track of the OTS. (Outside OTS operating periods, a random route can also follow a standard OTS route).
The NAT Track Message 77. This message gives full details of the co-ordinates of the organised tracks as well as the flight levels that are expected to be in use on each track. In most cases there are also details of domestic entry and exit routings associated with individual tracks. In the day-time system the most northerly track, at its point of origin, is designated Track ‘A’ (Alpha) and the next most northerly Track ‘B’ (Bravo) etc. In the night-time system the most southerly track, at its point of origin, is designated Track ‘Z’ (Zulu) and the next most southerly ‘Y’ etc. The hours of validity of the two Organised Track System (OTS) are normally as follows:
Chapter 5 Page 30
Day-time OTS
Westbound
1130UTC – 1800UTC at 030ºW
Night-time OTS
Eastbound
0100UTC – 0800UTC at 030ºW
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures FIGURE 5-3 Example of DayTime Westbound Organised Track System (Valid 1130 to 1800UTC at 030°W)
Chapter 5 Page 31
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures FIGURE 5-4 Example of Westbound NAT Track Message
Chapter 5 Page 32
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures FIGURE 5-5 Example of NightTime Eastbound Organised Track System (Valid 0100 to 0800 UTC at 030°W).
Chapter 5 Page 33
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures FIGURE 5-6 Example of Eastbound NAT Track Message
Chapter 5 Page 34
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures 78. Interpreting the NAT Track Message. In Figure 5-4, the most northerly track, Alpha, is routed westbound via 59N 010W, 61N 020W, 61N 030W, 61N 040W, 61N 050W, 60N 060W, reporting point ‘CIMAT’. Westbound, levels available along this track are FL310, 320, 330, 340, 350, 360, 390. There are no eastbound levels. Additional details are added concerning link routes to Europe or North America. Alpha/numeric details relate to North American Routes (NAR) available. In the Remarks section, the originating OAC identified each NAT Track Message with a 3-digit Track Message Identification (TMI) number equivalent to the Julian calender date on which that OTS is effective. (The Julian calender date is a simple progressions of numbered days, without reference to months, with numbering starting from the first day of the year, eg. February 1st is identified by TMI32. 79. Correct interpretation of the track message by airline dispatchers and aircrews is essential to both economy of operation and in minimising the possibility of misunderstanding leading to the use of incorrect track co-ordinates. Oceanic airspace outside the published OTS is available, subject to separation criteria and NOTAM restrictions. If an operator wishes to file partly or wholly outside the OTS, knowledge of separation criteria, the forecast upper wind situation and correct interpretation of the NAT Track Message will assist in judging the feasibility of the planned route.
ATC System Loop Error 80. An ATC system loop error is any error caused by a misunderstanding between the pilot and the controller regarding the assigned flight level, Mach No, or route to be followed. Such errors can arise from incorrect interpretation of the NAT Track Message by dispatcher, errors in co-ordination between OACs or misinterpretation of Oceanic Clearances or re-clearances by pilots.
Chapter 5 Page 35
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
OTS Changeover Periods 81. To ensure a smooth transition from night to day track systems and vice-versa, a period of several hours is interposed between the termination of one system and the commencement of the next. These periods are from 0801 to 1129 UTC and from 1801 to 0059 UTC, (ie, between the OTS validity periods). 82.
Flights within this period are required to file ‘random route’ flight plans.
Selection of Cruising Levels 83. During the OTS periods (eastbound 0100 - 0800 UTC, westbound 1130 - 1800 UTC) aircraft intending to follow an OTS track for its entire length may plan at any of the levels as published for that track on the current daily OTS message (normally within the bound FL310 to FL390 inclusive at 1000ft intervals). 84. Flights which are planned to remain clear of the OTS or which join or leave an OTS track (ie. follow an OTS track for only part of its published length) and flights which are outside the OTS periods, should normally plan flight level(s) appropriate to the direction of the flight. 85. Under the implementation of RVSM within MNPS Airspace, the system known as the Flight Level Allocation System (FLAS) allocates approximate direction levels as follows:
Chapter 5 Page 36
(a)
Appropriate Direction Eastbound Levels - FL270, 290, 310, 330, 350, 370, 390, 410, 450 etc.
(b)
Appropriate Direction Westbound Levels - FL260, 280, 320, 340, 360, 380, 430, 470 etc.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures Note. Current AIPs may specify some exceptions to these levels both inside and outside OTS periods. Reference must therefore be made to current AIPs when planning such flights as level restrictions may be imposed. 86. Random route flights which cross 030°W just prior to the start of the next OTS period and which are opposite to that periods flow have only a limited allocation of levels. Specifically, eastbound flights crossing at 1030 UTC or later have FLs 290, 350, 370, 410 allocated and westbound flights crossing at 2200 UTC or later have FLs 280, 320, 340, 380, 410 allocated.
Preferred Route Message (PRM) 87. As part of the daily planning of the OTS, oceanic planners take into consideration operators’ preferred routes. Aircraft operators are therefore required to provide a Preferred Route Message (PRM) indicating the number of turbo-jet flights and routes likely to be requested during each of the main traffic periods. The westbound (daytime) PRM must be submitted no later than 1900 UTC and the eastbound (night time) PRM no later than 1000 UTC.
The Polar Track Structure 88. A Polar Track Structure (PTS), consisting of 10 fixed tracks in Reykjavik CTA and 5 fixed tracks through Bodo OCA has been established. The PTS tracks through Bodo OCA constitute a continuation of relevant PTS tracks in Reykjavik CTA (see Figure 5-7).
Chapter 5 Page 37
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures FIGURE 5-7 Polar Track Structure
Chapter 5 Page 38
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures 89. Although not mandatory, flights planning to operate on the Europe-Alaska axis at FL 310390 inclusive are recommended to submit flight plans in accordance with one of the promulgated PTS tracks.
Flight Plans 90. If (and only if) the flight is planned to operate the whole length of one of the polar tracks, the intended track should be defined in item 15 of the flight plan using the abbreviation ‘PTS’ plus the track number. All other flights are considered to be random route flights and full track details must be specified. 91. The requested Mach number and flight level should be specified at the start of the PTS or at the NAT Oceanic boundary. Each point at which a Mach number or flight level change is planned must be specified as latitude and longitude followed in each case by ‘PTS’ and the track code.
Abbreviated Clearances 92. An abbreviated clearance may be used when clearing an aircraft to follow one of the polar tracks throughout its flight within the Reykjavik CTA and/or the Bodo OCA. When an abbreviated clearance is issued it shall include: •
the cleared track specified by the track code:
•
the cleared flight level(s); and
•
the cleared Mach Number. (if required).
93. On receipt of an abbreviated clearance the pilot shall read back the contents of the clearance message and in addition the full details of the track specified by the track code.
Chapter 5 Page 39
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transoceanic (North Atlantic) Procedures
Abbreviated Position Reports 94. When operating on the PTS within the Reykjavik CTA and/or Bodo OCA position reports may be abbreviated by replacing the normal latitude co-ordinate with the word ‘Polar’ followed by the track code. For example: Position Japanair 422 Polar Romeo 20W/1620, estimating Polar Romeo 40W/1718 Flight Level 330, next Polar Romeo 69W. 95. Unless otherwise required by air traffic services a position report must be made at the significant points listed in the appropriate AIP for the relevant PTS track.
Additional Information on the PTS 96. Further information on PTS procedures, track co-ordinates etc, is contained in AIP Iceland/ Norway and/or Icelandic/Norwegian NOTAMs.
Chapter 5 Page 40
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Polar Navigation Specific Problems Navigation-Contingency Procedures Steering By Directional Gyro (DG) Grid Navigation
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation
6
Polar Navigation
Specific Problems 1. Flight at high latitudes near to the North (or South) Pole requires careful planning because of specific problems associated with polar navigation. Even with modern navigation systems difficulties can arise and diligent monitoring of navigation systems is essential so that any errors can be corrected quickly. Contingency procedures should be available to the flight crew to overcome the special problems resulting from navigation systems failure in high latitudes. 2.
Chapter 6 Page 1
Types of problem associated with polar navigation: (a)
Horizontal component of Earth magnetism weak. Proximity to the north magnetic pole means that the horizontal (directional) component of the Earth’s magnetic field is sufficiently weak to make magnetic compass systems unreliable or useless. (In addition because the vertical component of the field is strong, the angle of dip on a compass magnet or magnetic sensor is increased resulting in increased turning and acceleration errors). In the absence of INS, steering by directional gyro becomes necessary in these areas. Figure 6-1 illustrates the general area of compass unreliability.
(b)
Variation changes. Large changes of magnetic variation are likely in Polar Regions because of the proximity to the magnetic pole.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation (c)
Longitude changes. Rapid changes of longitude occur when operating close to the geographic north (and south) Poles and short distance errors can result in large positional errors.
(d)
Convergence of meridians. Near to the Pole the convergence of meridians means that an aircraft in flight will experience rapid changes in the direction of true north. This effect causes the direction of great circle tracks to change rapidly and in the absence of a modern INS the use of an alternative north reference and grid navigation is required. Convergence of meridians also creates the problem of Transport Precession (also called Transport Wander) when using a Directional Gyro for heading reference.
Chapter 6 Page 2
(e)
Gyro drift corrections. Operations close to the Pole using Directional Gyros result in the need for high rates of gyro correction for the apparent drift due to the rotation of the Earth (this is normally called ‘Earth Rate’ but is also known as ‘Astronomic Precession’).
(f)
General environment. The polar region is large and lacks suitable alternate aerodromes, short-range navigation and communication (VHF) facilities, and hospitable terrain. Thule airport, for example, in Greenland, is the nearest aerodrome to the North Pole that is suitable for a large turbojet aeroplane but is approximately 810nm from the Pole and is inside the compass unreliability area.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation
Navigation-Contingency Procedures 3. When operating with modern long-range navigation systems normal navigation in Polar Regions should not present any undue problems. However, in an aircraft fitted with two LRNS, if one system should fail, contingency procedures should be adopted in case the second system should also fail. If this were to occur, the crew would then have to contend with some of the problems summarised in paragraph 2.
Magnetic Compass Reliability 4. The extent of the ‘compass unreliable’ area is shown at Figure 6-1. Aircraft operating in this area cannot rely on the accuracy of compass systems that either sense or seek, magnetic north. Therefore, slaved gyro magnetic systems cease to be reliable, and direct reading standby compasses are likely to be subject to large errors. Aircraft needing to revert to basic navigation or to use contingency procedures are obliged therefore, to operate with a Directional Gyro heading reference.
Chapter 6 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-1 Compass Unreliable Area
Chapter 6 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation 5. Reversionary procedures in the event of a failure of the aircraft’s primary navigation systems are likely to include steering the aircraft by Directional Gyro and the adoption of Grid Navigation techniques.
Steering By Directional Gyro (DG) 6. Should it become necessary to steer by reference DG, two main factors must be taken into account: (a)
Earth Rate (Astronomic) precession;
(b)
Transport precession (Transport Wander);
Earth Rate Precession 7. The main property of a gyroscope, on which steering by gyro reference relies, is ‘rigidity in space’. A directional gyro is a freely mounted gyroscope whose spin axis is maintained in the horizontal plane (of the Earth). The property of rigidity means that the spin axis of the gyro defines a fixed direction with respect to space (as opposed to the Earth). Therefore, since the Earth is rotating on its own axis in space, the spin axis of a gyro will appear to change direction proportional to the rate of Earth rotation (Earth Rate). At the Poles this apparent drift rate is 15.04 deg/hr but at any other latitude it is 15.04 x sine latitude deg/hr. This problem is present whether a directional gyro is on the ground or in an aircraft in flight.
Chapter 6 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation 8. A directional gyro aligned initially with the local meridian (true north) will appear therefore to ‘drift’ from this direction, due to Earth Rate, at 15.04 x sine latitude deg/hr. The sense of this apparent drift is described as negative in the Northern Hemisphere because it causes the gyro to underread the correct true heading. The effect is the opposite and therefore positive in the Southern Hemisphere. The effect of Earth Rate is illustrated in Figure 6-2.
FIGURE 6-2 Effect of Earth Rate
9. At the Equator Earth Rate has no effect, (sine 0° = 0) because meridians at the Equator are parallel to the spin axis of the Earth.
Chapter 6 Page 6
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation Effect of ER - Aircraft Stationary on Ground 10. The effect, of Earth Rate, on the DG of an aircraft that is stationary on the ground and pointing in a fixed direction, with respect to local true north, is to cause the heading output to reduce (in the Northern Hemisphere) at the rate of 15.04 x sine lat deg/hr. In the Southern Hemisphere the DG reading would increase due to ER.
Effect of ER - Aircraft in Flight 11. The effect of Earth Rate on the DG of an aircraft in flight that is maintaining a constant DG indicated heading is to cause the gyro indicated heading to under read the correct true heading in the Northern Hemisphere and to overread the true heading in the Southern Hemisphere. The flight path of an aircraft in the Northern Hemisphere would therefore turn continually to the right at the appropriate rate and in the Southern Hemisphere the turn would be to the left. The effect of ER on an aircraft in flight maintaining a constant DG indicated heading is illustrated in Figure 6-3(a) and Figure 6-3(b).
Chapter 6 Page 7
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-3 (a) Effect of Earth Rate on DG Northern Hemisphere (b) Effect of Earth Rate on DG Southern Hemisphere
Chapter 6 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation
Correcting for Earth Rate 12. The correction for ER can be applied either as an induced precession in the opposite sense to ER (known as a latitude correction) or, by adjusting the aircraft heading to allow for the progressive error in the actual true heading of the aircraft.
Chapter 6 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation 13. Automatic correction for Earth Rate. In the Northern Hemisphere the effect of ER is to cause a Directional Gyro to under read the true heading and therefore a precession correction in the positive sense is required. When such an hourly rate corrector is fitted, the flight crew are required to set it to the correct latitude and to reset as necessary (in high latitudes this could mean resetting the corrector at least every 20 minutes). The output of the corrector results in real precession of the spin axis of the DG so as to cancel out the effect of ER. 14. When set to a southerly latitude the correction device produces a negative precession to counteract the positive ER in the Southern Hemisphere. 15. An alternative method of correcting for ER is to turn the aircraft at the appropriate opposite rate. When operating near to the Pole (i.e. in latitudes 70deg and above) the value of ER can be assumed for practical purposes to be 15 deg/hr. Since the effect of ER on an aircraft steering a constant DG reading in the Northern Hemisphere is to increase true heading by 15 deg/hr, the correction would involve turning the aircraft left by the same amount. Such a correction could be achieved by turning left 5 deg every 20 minutes.
Transport Precession 16. Transport Precession (also called Transport Wander) is the apparent drift of a DG caused by being transported across meridians. The effect of Transport Precession varies with both the hemisphere and heading direction and is illustrated in principle in Figure 6-4(a) to (d).
Chapter 6 Page 10
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-4
Chapter 6 Page 11
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation 17. Figure 6-4(a) shows that when the aircraft is travelling in a direction with an easterly component in the Northern Hemisphere, the DG will under read the correct true heading. An aircraft maintaining a constant DG heading will therefore turn progressively to the right as the actual true heading increases. 18. Figure 6-4 (b) shows the effect of an aircraft maintaining a DG heading with a westerly component in the Northern Hemisphere. In this case the DG overreads the correct true heading and the aircraft will turn progressively towards the left of its intended track. 19. Figure 6-4 (c) and (d) illustrate the effect of Transport Precession in the Southern Hemisphere. It can be seen that the sense of the effect is opposite to that of the Northern Hemisphere, in that the DG overreads true heading when being transported eastwards and under reads true heading when being transported westwards. 20. Calculation of Transport Precession. The magnitude of Transport Precession in terms of degrees per hour is a function of the aircraft’s rate of crossing meridians (change of longitude in degrees per hour) and therefore depends on its ground speed and track direction as well as the latitude. (It should be apparent therefore that for a given speed and direction, meridians will be crossed more rapidly at high latitudes, and the effect of this error is therefore greater). The value of Transport Precession can be calculated from the formula; G ⁄ S Comp ( East – West ) ( kt ) × tan lat Transport Precession (deg/hr) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------60
Chapter 6 Page 12
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation 21. The combined effect of Earth Rate (Astronomic Precession) and Transport Precession can therefore be calculated and a suitable correction applied to a Directional Gyro so that it remains aligned with local true north and indicates true heading. If only an Earth Rate correction is applied to a DG it will remain in alignment with the meridian to which it was aligned originally. This property is suitable for use with grid navigation
Grid Navigation 22. Convergence of meridians near to the Poles means that conventional navigation without the aid of modern automatic systems is limited by the rapid changes in the direction of true north as an aircraft crosses successive meridians. (To illustrate the magnitude of the problem, an aircraft flying in an east-west direction at 80N at a speed of 200kt will experience a 5 degree change in the direction of true north every 15 minutes.) An alternative to the true north reference system is required. 23. Grid navigation involves the use of a conventional chart based on the Polar Stereographic or Lamberts Conformal Conic projections which is overprinted with a grid. The grid is normally printed with parallel lines at 60nm or 100nm intervals. Grid north is therefore the same direction all over the chart. In North Polar areas grid charts normally are arranged with Grid North parallel to true north at the Greenwich Meridian. The Greenwich Meridian is therefore described as the ‘Grid Datum Meridian’. The appearance of a Lamberts Chart overprinted with grid lines is illustrated at Figure 6-5 and that of a Polar Stereographic Chart at Figure 6-6.
Chapter 6 Page 13
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-5 Example of Gridded Lamberts Chart
Chapter 6 Page 14
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-6 Gridded Polar Stereographic Chart
Chapter 6 Page 15
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation 24. Tracks (and radio bearings) plotted on the grid chart as straight lines can be considered to be great circles because the base chart is either a Polar Stereographic or a Lamberts projection on which a straight line will represent a great circle, without significant error.
Grid Convergence 25. The angular difference between true north and grid north is called grid convergence. It can be seen that this difference is equivalent on a Polar Stereographic chart to the difference of longitude between the Grid Datum meridian and the local meridian. On a Lamberts chart the convergence value must be calculated from the difference of longitude multiplied by the chart convergence factor. The equation may be written as: Lamberts chart convergence = d’long (deg) x convergence factor (Note. Convergence factor is the sine of the parallel of origin of the projection and can be expressed as convergence factor or, constant of the cone or, ‘n’.) 26. The sense (east or west) of grid convergence determines whether it must be added or subtracted from true direction to convert to grid direction. Convergence is described as ‘east’ when true north is to the east of grid north and ‘west’ when true north is west of grid north. This arrangement is illustrated in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8.
Chapter 6 Page 16
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-7 Convergence East
Chapter 6 Page 17
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-8 Convergence West
27.
Grid direction can be calculated from true using the following equation:
Grid direction = True direction + Convergence East - Convergence West 28. For operations in the North Polar Region where the grid datum is the Greenwich Meridian a simple ‘rule of thumb’ method of determining grid track from true track direction is: Grid track = True track + Longitude West - Longitude East
Chapter 6 Page 18
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation
Heading references Directional Gyro 29. In Polar areas where magnetic compass systems are unreliable and INS is not available, steering by Directional Gyro (DG) is necessary. Providing the DG is corrected for Earth Rate (Astronomic Precession) its output will remain referenced to the initial alignment direction. In grid navigation this alignment will be to grid north. A correction for Transport precession is not required in grid navigation because the grid lines on the chart do not converge.
Magnetic Reference 30. Further away from the Poles, magnetic compass systems can be used for reference when using a grid navigation technique, providing the output of a gyro-magnetic compass system is corrected to give grid headings. 31. In this case, the conversion from magnetic north to grid north is a combination of magnetic variation and grid convergence. The sum of the two corrections is called ’Grivation’ and is annotated as east or west as appropriate, based on the two components The following equation illustrates the relationship between grid and magnetic directions: Grid direction = Magnetic direction + Variation E +Convergence E - Variation W - Convergence W
Chapter 6 Page 19
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation 32. Lines of equal grivation (isogrivs) are plotted on gridded charts, in the same way as isogonals. When operating a compass based on magnetic north, the value of grivation can therefore be inserted at the variation setting control to give a grid heading output. 33. Two examples showing the relationship between magnetic, true and grid north are illustrated inFigure 6-9 and Figure 6-10.
FIGURE 6-9 Effect of Variation, Convergence and Grivation
Chapter 6 Page 20
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-10 Effect of Variation, Convergence and Grivation
34. Some examples of problems including conversions to grid from magnetic and true are given below:
Chapter 6 Page 21
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation EXAMPLE 6-1
EXAMPLE An aircraft in position 75N 075W obtains a bearing of 290(M) from a VOR. Grid navigation is being used, based on a Polar Stereographic chart on which the Greenwich meridian is the grid datum. The variation at the VOR is 35° W. Convert the VOR bearing to a bearing to plot from grid north.
SOLUTION See Figure 6-11. Step 1. Convert magnetic bearing to true. •
290(M) - 35W = 255(T)
Step 2. Determine value of convergence. •
Difference of longitude 75°
•
TN east of GN
Step 3. Apply convergence to true bearing. •
Chapter 6 Page 22
255(T) + 75E = 330(G).
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-11
Alternative solution using grivation is: Grid convergence is 75E, variation is 35W, and therefore grivation is 40E. Grid bearing from the VOR = 290(M) + 40E = 330 (G)
Chapter 6 Page 23
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation EXAMPLE 6-2
EXAMPLE At aerodrome ‘X’ the runway QDM is 310 deg; local variation is 2W; the position is 61N 150W; assuming the Grid datum is based on the Greenwich meridian, calculate the runway direction in Grid.
SOLUTION Grid convergence is 150E, variation is 2W, therefore grivation is 148E. Runway direction (G) = 310(M) + 148E = 458(G) = 458 – 360 = 098(G) [‘Rule of Thumb’ solution Runway grid direction = 308(T) + Longitude west. = 308 + 150 = 458 - (360) = 098(G)]
Chapter 6 Page 24
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation EXAMPLE 6-3
EXAMPLE An aircraft is at position 80ºN 150ºW and is making good a track of 330º (T). Express this track in degrees grid assuming that a polar stereographic chart is being used and that the chart is overlaid with a grid which is aligned with the Greenwich meridian.
SOLUTION See Figure 6-12. Convergence is equal to the change of longitude between the datum meridian and the meridian in question (150º) and by inspection is easterly. The true track direction is therefore less than the grid track direction by 150º, and the grid track is in this case (330º + 150º) = 120º (G).
Chapter 6 Page 25
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-12
[‘Rule of Thumb’ solution Grid track = True track + Longitude west = 330 + 150 = 480 (-360) = 120(G)]
Chapter 6 Page 26
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation EXAMPLE 6-4
EXAMPLE An aircraft is in position 60N 037W heading 260(T). Grid navigation technique is being used on a Lambert’s chart with a grid datum based on the Greenwich Meridian. The convergence factor of the chart is .788. Calculate the grid heading of the aircraft.
SOLUTION Grid convergence is the value of chart convergence between
000E/W and 037W.
Using the equation: chart convergence = d’long x convergence factor Grid convergence = 37 x .788 = 29° and, by inspection, true north is east of grid north at the aircraft position, therefore the convergence is east.
Chapter 6 Page 27
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-13
Therefore, Grid heading = 260(T) + 29E = 289 (G)
Chapter 6 Page 28
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation EXAMPLE 6-5
EXAMPLE An aircraft is in position 70S 140W heading 045(T). Navigation is on a Polar Stereographic chart which is overprinted with a grid based on the 180E/W meridian. Calculate the grid heading of the aircraft. Grid convergence is 40° (d’long between 180E/W and 140W) True north is east of grid north, therefore the convergence is east. Grid heading = 045(T) + 40E = 085(G) The diagram at Figure 6-14 illustrates the geometry of the situation.
Chapter 6 Page 29
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation FIGURE 6-14
[Alternative ‘Rule of Thumb’ solution for Southern Hemisphere Grid heading = True heading + (180 - Longitude West + Longitude East = 045 + 40 = 085(G)]
Chapter 6 Page 30
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation EXAMPLE 6-6
EXAMPLE An aircraft is in position 70N 020E navigating on a Polar Stereographic chart, the grid datum is 000E/W. If the current grid heading is 310°, calculate the true heading.
SOLUTION FIGURE 6-15
Chapter 6 Page 31
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation Grid heading = True heading + Convergence E - Convergence W Convergence is 20° TN is west of GN so convergence is west, therefore 310(G) = True heading - 20W True heading = 310 + 20 = 330°(T) [‘Rule of Thumb’ solution Grid heading = True heading - Longitude East 310 = True - 20, therefore True Heading = 310 + 20 = 330(T)]
Chapter 6 Page 32
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation Self Assessed Exercise No. 3 QUESTIONS: QUESTION 1. State which ICAO document contains details of transoceanic procedures. QUESTION 2. What do the letters MNPSA stand for. QUESTION 3. Define the following abbreviations: OCA, OTS, MASPS, RVSM, WATRS. QUESTION 4. State the lateral limits of Class A airspace in the North Atlantic region. QUESTION 5. State the vertical limits of Class A airspace in the North Atlantic region. QUESTION 6. State the lateral limits of MNPS airspace. QUESTION 7. State the vertical limits of MNPS airspace
Chapter 6 Page 33
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 8. State the certification requirements for an aeroplane to operate in MNPS airspace. QUESTION 9. State the minimum vertical separation in RVSM airspace. QUESTION 10. Describe the method of defining significant points on the ATS flight plan for flights in a predominantly east/west direction. south of latitude 70N north of latitude 70N QUESTION 11. Describe the method of defining significant points on the ATS flight plan for flights predominantly in a north/south direction. QUESTION 12. State the maximum flight time between significant points. QUESTION 13. Describe the type of track that should be planned between significant points.
Chapter 6 Page 34
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 14. State the method of indicating on the ATS flight plan that the flight is certified for MNPS ops. QUESTION 15. State how the cruising speed for a turbo-jet aeroplane must be entered in the ATS flight plan for flight in the OCA’s of NAT airspace. QUESTION 16. Describe the procedure for entering the route, on the ATS flight plan, when it is wholly within the OTS. QUESTION 17. State the latest time of submission of flight plans for flights intending to enter the NAT region. QUESTION 18. State the general minimum navigation performance requirements for unrestricted MNPS operation in terms of track error expressed in nautical miles and as an equivalent RNP value. QUESTION 19. State the MNPS navigation systems specification. QUESTION 20. Describe what systems constitute long range navigation systems.
Chapter 6 Page 35
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 21. State what action should be planned by aeroplanes which do not have MNPS approval or which are unable to meet MNPS requirements. QUESTION 22. Define GNE. QUESTION 23. State in which areas VOR’s are referenced to true north. QUESTION 24. Describe from general knowledge some possible indications of navigation system degradation. QUESTION 25. Describe what action may be taken when a discrepancy exists between two independent navigation systems. QUESTION 26. Describe the meaning of the term ‘composite separation’. QUESTION 27. State the minimum lateral separation in the NAT region as defined in DOC 7030 for flights which meet MNPS requirements in, above or below MNPS airspace.
Chapter 6 Page 36
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 28. State the minimum lateral separation in the NAT region between non-MNPS certificated aeroplanes. QUESTION 29. Describe the technique used to maintain longitudinal separation between subsonic turbo-jet aeroplanes in MNPS airspace. QUESTION 30. State the minimum time separation between aeroplanes on the same track with the same Mach number. QUESTION 31. Describe how separation may be reduced using Mach number technique. QUESTION 32. State the minimum longitudinal separation between aircraft where Mach number technique is not used. QUESTION 33. State when an abbreviated clearance may be used. QUESTION 34. Describe the basic content of an abbreviated clearance.
Chapter 6 Page 37
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 35. State what minimum change in ETA for the Oceanic entry point (or any other ETA) must be reported to ATC. QUESTION 36. State where position reports should be made and how position is described in MNPS airspace. when flying routes not defined by designated points east-west flights north-south flights QUESTION 37. State when position reports should be copied to adjacent OCA’s QUESTION 38. Describe the procedure to be followed if a flight is unable to continue in accordance with its current ATC clearance and prior clearance for a deviation cannot be obtained by RT. QUESTION 39. Describe the actions required if following a deviation, the aircraft is unable to obtain a revised ATC clearance.
Chapter 6 Page 38
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 40. Describe the actions required when diverting from an assigned track in MNPS airspace when: the aircraft can maintain assigned level the aircraft is unable to maintain assigned level QUESTION 41. State the primary means of air/ground communications when in NAT airspace. QUESTION 42. State how messages are received by ATC controllers. QUESTION 43. List the items which comprise the correct operation of SELCAL. QUESTION 44. State the frequency reserved only for air to air communications in MNPS airspace and which other frequency must be guarded. QUESTION 45. Describe the procedure to be used for communicating with ATC when HF fails when out of range of VHF station.
Chapter 6 Page 39
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 46. Describe the procedure to be adopted when radio failure occurs. prior to entering the NAT region. prior to leaving the NAT region. QUESTION 47. State the SSR procedures applicable to entry and operation within NAT airspace. QUESTION 48. Describe the procedures to be adopted when. one LRNS fails before reaching the MNPS airspace (OCA) boundary one LRNS fails after entering MNPS airspace remaining LRNS fails after entering MNPS airspace. QUESTION 49. In the OTS, state the reference longitude for all timing. QUESTION 50. State the hours of validity of westbound and eastbound tracks. QUESTION 51. State how step climbs may be facilitated.
Chapter 6 Page 40
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 52. Describe the OTS track lettering system. QUESTION 53. State how routes which do not follow the OTS are described. QUESTION 54. State what routes must be planned outside OTS periods. QUESTION 55. State in general the system of levels used for flights which only use part of the OTS or which operate outside OTS periods. QUESTION 56. Describe an ATC system loop error. QUESTION 57. State the latest time for submission of a PRM. QUESTION 58. Describe in general the PTS. QUESTION 59. State whether adherence to the PTS at FL310 – 390 is mandatory.
Chapter 6 Page 41
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 60. Describe how a PTS track should be entered in the ATC flight plan. QUESTION 61. State how cruising speed should be entered in the ATC flight plan. QUESTION 62. Explain why magnetic compasses become unreliable in polar zones. QUESTION 63. Describe the general problems associated with polar navigation. QUESTION 64. Describe the main reversionary procedure used in polar areas when the primary navigation systems fail. QUESTION 65. State the drift rate of a directional gyro due to earth rate (astronomical precession). QUESTION 66. Describe the effect of earth rate on a DG output when the aircraft is stationary on the ground.
Chapter 6 Page 42
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 67. Describe the effect of earth rate drift on an aircraft maintaining a constant heading using an uncorrected gyro. QUESTION 68. State the formula for calculating the apparent drift due to transport precession and describe its effect. QUESTION 69. State why an alternative to a true north reference is required in polar areas. QUESTION 70. State the formula for calculating chart convergence on: Lamberts Conformal Polar Stereographic QUESTION 71. Show the relationship between grid and true direction. QUESTION 72. Show how a compass heading can be converted to grid.
Chapter 6 Page 43
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation QUESTION 73. Solve the following problem: An aircraft in position 75N 075W obtains a bearing of 290(M) from a VOR. Grid navigation is being used, based on a Polar Stereographic chart with the Greenwich Meridian as the grid datum. Variation at the VOR is 35°W. Convert the VOR bearing to a bearing to plot from true north. QUESTION 74. Calculate the grid direction of the runway at airport ‘X’ where the runway QDM is 310°, variation is 2°W, and the position is 61N 150W. The grid on a Polar Stereographic chart is based on the Greenwich Meridian. QUESTION 75. Calculate the grid heading of an aircraft in position 70S 140W heading 045°(T). Navigation is on a Polar Stereographic chart with a grid datum of 180°E/W.
Chapter 6 Page 44
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWERS: ANSWER 1. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-1 Para 1 ANSWER 2. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-3 Para 5 ANSWER 3. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-3/5 Para 8-11 ANSWER 4. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-2 Para 4 ANSWER 5. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-2 Para 4
Chapter 6 Page 45
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 6. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-3 Para 8 ANSWER 7. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-3 Para 7 ANSWER 8. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-3 Para 6 ANSWER 9. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-5 Para 10 ANSWER 10. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-5/6 Para 13/14
Chapter 6 Page 46
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 11. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-5/6 Para 16 ANSWER 12. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-5/5 Para 15 ANSWER 13. 0171 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-5 Para 12 ANSWER 14. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-6 Para 17 ANSWER 15. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-6 Para 18
Chapter 6 Page 47
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 16. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-6 Para 19 ANSWER 17. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-7 Para 20 ANSWER 18. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-7 Para 21 ANSWER 19. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-7 Para 22 ANSWER 20. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-7 Para 22
Chapter 6 Page 48
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 21. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-7 Para 22 ANSWER 22. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-8 Para 23 ANSWER 23. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-8 Para 25 ANSWER 24. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-8 Para 24/25 (system computed wind velocity value changes significantly, sudden change in ETA, steering demand (heading required) significantly different from navigation flight plan). ANSWER 25. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-8 Para 25
Chapter 6 Page 49
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 26. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-9 Para 27 (Note: Annex 11 describes composite separation as a combination of vertical and either lateral or longitudinal separation using minima which may be lower, but not less than half of those which apply normally to each type alone. This type of separation is only applied on the basis of regional air navigation agreement). ANSWER 27. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-9 Para 28 ANSWER 28. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-9 Para 28 ANSWER 29. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-9 Para 29
Chapter 6 Page 50
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 30. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-9 Para 30 ANSWER 31. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-10 Para 30 ANSWER 32. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-10 Para 30 ANSWER 33. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-11 Para 32 ANSWER 34. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-11 Para 32
Chapter 6 Page 51
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 35. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-11 Para 35 ANSWER 36. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-11 Para 36-41 ANSWER 37. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-12 Para 42 ANSWER 38. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-12 Para 47 ANSWER 39. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-12 Para 48
Chapter 6 Page 52
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 40. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-14/15 Para 49-51 ANSWER 41. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-15 Para 52 ANSWER 42. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-16 Para 52 ANSWER 43. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-16 Para 55 ANSWER 44. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-17 Para 57
Chapter 6 Page 53
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 45. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-17 Para 58 ANSWER 46. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-17/18 Para 60/61 ANSWER 47. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-18 Para 63 ANSWER 48. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-18/19 Para 65-67 ANSWER 49. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-20 Para 69
Chapter 6 Page 54
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 50. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-15 Para 69 ANSWER 51. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-15 Para 71 & 5-10 Para 31 ANSWER 52. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-25 Para 77 ANSWER 53. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-25 Para 76 ANSWER 54. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-26 Para 81
Chapter 6 Page 55
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 55. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-27 Para 84/85 ANSWER 56. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-26 Para 80 ANSWER 57. 071 01 03 03 Chap 5 5-27 Para 87 ANSWER 58. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-28 Para 88 ANSWER 59. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-30 Para 89
Chapter 6 Page 56
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 60. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-30 Para 90 ANSWER 61. 071 01 03 02 Chap 5 5-30 Para 91 ANSWER 62. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-1 paragraph 2 ANSWER 63. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-1 paragraph 2 ANSWER 64. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-3 paragraph 5
Chapter 6 Page 57
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 65. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-4 paragraph 7 ANSWER 66. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-4 paragraph 10 ANSWER 67. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-5 paragraph 11 ANSWER 68. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-8 paragraph 20 ANSWER 69. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-8 paragraph 22
Chapter 6 Page 58
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 70. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-10 paragraph 25 ANSWER 71. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-11 paragraph 27 ANSWER 72. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-12 Para paragraph 31-33 ANSWER 73. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-13 Example 6-1 ANSWER 74. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-14 Example 6-2
Chapter 6 Page 59
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Polar Navigation ANSWER 75. 071 01 03 02 Chap 6 6-17 Example 6-5
Chapter 6 Page 60
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Special Operational Procedures Minimum Equipment List Aeroplane Flight Manual Aeroplane De-Icing and Anti-Icing Bird Strike Risk and Avoidance Noise Abatement Procedures Fire and Smoke Procedures Decompression of the Pressurised Cabin
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
7
Special Operational Procedures
Minimum Equipment List 1. The operator is required to establish for each aeroplane a minimum equipment list (MEL). The MEL must be approved by the State of the operator. 2. The MEL must be based on the master minimum equipment list (MMEL) produced by the organisation responsible for the type design of the aeroplane and approved by the State of design. 3.
The operator is required to include the MEL in the operations manual.
4. The primary function of the MEL is to enable the pilot-in-command to determine whether a flight may be commenced or, continued from any intermediate stop, should any instrument, equipment or systems become inoperative. 5. The operator is not permitted to operate an aeroplane other than in accordance with the MEL unless permitted by the Authority.
Aeroplane Flight Manual 6. ICAO Annex 8 (Airworthiness Standards) requires that aeroplanes of over 5700kg maximum certificated take-off weight have an aeroplane flight manual (AFM). The AFM must identify clearly the specific aeroplane or series of aeroplanes with which it is related. 7.
Chapter 7 Page 1
The items which must be included in the AFM are:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Chapter 7 Page 2
(a)
operating limitations;
(b)
loading limitations;
(c)
airspeed limitations;
(d)
powerplant limitations;
(e)
limitations on equipment and systems;
(f)
other specified limitations concerning safety;
(g)
flight crew limitations;
(h)
flying time limitations after system or power unit failure in the case of ETOPS aeroplanes;
(i)
operating information and procedures including: •
loading - empty mass, condition of the aeroplane at the time of weighing, the corresponding C of G position and the reference point(s)/datum lines to which the C of G limits are related.
•
operating procedures - normal and emergency
•
handing information - including any significant or unusual features and stalling speeds
•
performance information and guidance
•
requirements for markings and placards.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Aeroplane De-Icing and Anti-Icing Ice and Snow on the Ground 8. Any deposits of ice, snow or frost on the external surfaces of an aircraft can have a drastic effect on performance and must be removed before flight.
Hoar Frost 9. Hoar frost forms when air is cooled and water vapour deposits directly on to surfaces which are at or below the ‘frost point’ of the air. The process is given the name ‘sublimation’ although the more accurate term is ‘deposition’. Hoar frost is a white crystalline coating and can form on all surfaces. The atmospheric conditions required for Hoar frost are dry air (so that the Dew point is below 0°C) and conditions which allow maximum cooling (night, clear skies, light/calm wind, land surface). Such conditions are most likely in anticyclonic or col weather systems in winter.
Clear Ice 10. Clear ice can form on an aircraft on the ground in a number of ways. However, all processes have in common the requirement for water droplets which are either supercooled (ie. liquid but below 0°C) or are cooled to below 0°C in contact with the aircraft. 11. Small droplets such as those formed in fog which has cooled to below zero (freezing fog) or when the airframe is just below zero tend to produce ‘rime’. This type of ice on the ground forms when small droplets freeze quickly, trapping air and becomes a white crystalline build up, particularly on the windward side of surfaces.
Chapter 7 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 12. Larger droplets tend to spread over the airframe before solidifying resulting in a clear and sometimes thick, dense deposit of ice. Freezing rain or rain falling on to surfaces below 0°C can induce such ice formation. The passage of a cold front or cold occlusion when cold conditions are likely to allow the ice to persist.
Snow and Slush 13. Snow is typically associated with frontal cloud, nimbostratus, cumulus and stratocumulus. It can reach the ground when the surface temperature is below about +4°C. Large snowflakes form when the temperature is just below 0°C becoming powdery at lower temperatures. Snow which is starting to melt to give slush is easily removed but when sprayed up from the wheels can coat the under surface of an aeroplane subsequently freezing to structures on further cooling (in-flight for example).
Effects of Ice and Snow On the Ground 14. Hoar frost can obscure visibility on windscreens, coat aerials and interfere with radio reception and restrict control movement. Furthermore, the roughness of the frosted surface can reduce aerodynamic performance and delay the attainment of flying speed on take-off, in addition it will provide a good basis for further ice formation in flight. 15. Clear ice is dense, heavy and is more difficult to remove. Similar problems to those caused by hoar frost are encountered with increased severity. In particular, the locking of moveable surfaces and the blocking of vents, and intakes can cause serious problems. The deposit of ice is likely to increase the mass of the aircraft significantly.
Chapter 7 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 16. Snow and slush is more easily removed, but if a partial thaw has taken place a coating of snow may disguise an underlying clear ice problem. Undercarriage and control surface operations can become restricted by slush which subsequently freezes.
In-Flight Effects 17. Similar problems to those already described can occur in flight however, the opportunities for ice formation are greatly increased by flight through cloud and in precipitation when temperatures are below 0°C.
Chapter 7 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 18.
Chapter 7 Page 6
Some more specific effects of icing are: (a)
Aerodynamic - ice deposits can change the airflow around an aerofoil. Drag will be increased and lift decreased. Stalling speed will increase. Wings with a thin crosssection attract ice more readily than thicker wings and may be more susceptible to the effect of the ice. Ice forms primarily on leading edges but can spread back to control surfaces.
(b)
Control surfaces - ice deposits on control surfaces can restrict their movements.
(c)
Balance - ice deposits can add mass to various parts of an aircraft and alter significantly the C of G position.
(d)
Engines - ice can restrict the flow into jet engine intakes and cause damage when it breaks off. The uneven distribution on propellers can cause vibration and associated wear. The blocking of intakes and filters by ‘impact icing’ can have an adverse effect on engine operation. Carburettor icing in piston engines can be a serious problem in conditions of high humidity and low throttle settings even in clear air. (More information on engine icing is contained in Meteorology, Chapter 9)
(e)
Flight Instruments. Pitot-static systems in particular are vulnerable to blockage by ice and will result in incorrect outputs from pressure instruments. A blocked Air Speed Indicator (ASI) pitot probe for example will underread the correct airspeed on takeoff.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (f)
Engine Monitoring Instruments. The blocking or partial blocking of engine monitoring instruments such as the Engine Pressure Ratio (EPR) probe can have dangerous consequences during take-off. EPR is used as a measure of the thrust being produced by a turbine engine. The pressure in the engine intake area is measured by a probe which projects into the airflow much like a pitot probe. A blocked EPR probe will result in an EPR indication which overreads the true value and therefore indicates a higher value of thrust than is actually being produced.
De-icing and Anti-icing 19. De-icing - the procedure whereby frost, ice, slush or snow is removed from an aircraft in order to provide clean surfaces. 20. De-icing systems are designed to remove ice from the external surfaces of an aircraft once it has formed. On the ground, hot air or fluid systems involving water or de-icing compounds may be used. Systems used in-flight include expandable rubber ‘boots’ on leading edges and hot air (thermal) systems. 21. De-icing in flight should only be carried out after the ice has formed so that it is of a significant size to be broken and carried away by the airflow. If the expansions/changes of shape created by de-icing boots, for example are applied too soon, the initial layer of ice lifts and more ice forms on top leaving a gap within which the boot movements are ineffective. 22. Anti-icing - the precautionary procedure which provides protection against the formation of frost or ice and the accumulation of snow or slush on treated surfaces of the aircraft for a limited period of time (the ‘holdover’ time).
Chapter 7 Page 7
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 23. Anti-icing systems are designed to prevent or limit the build up of ice. On the ground, this usually involves the use of anti-icing fluids. Aircraft anti-icing systems use fluids or hot air systems supplied from the compressor stage of gas turbine engines.
Removal of Ice and Other Contaminants Operator’s Responsibility 24. The Operator is required by JAR-OPS to establish procedures to be followed including inspection procedures when ground de-icing and anti-icing may be necessary.
Commander’s Responsibility 25. According to JAR-OPS a commander may not commence take-off unless the external surfaces are clear of any deposit which could adversely affect either performance or control of an aeroplane except as permitted in the Aeroplane Flight Manual (AFM). 26. A commander may not according to JAR-OPS commence a flight under known or expected icing conditions unless the aeroplane is certificated and equipped to cope with such conditions. 27. Information on de-icing and anti-icing on the ground is required to be included in the Operations Manual.
Chapter 7 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Types of De-Icing and Anti-Icing De-Icing/Anti-Icing Fluids 28.
There are two main types of de-icing/anti-icing fluids: (a)
Type I fluids. These types of fluid have a high glycol content and low viscosity, they are administered in a fluid water mix.
(b)
Type II/III/IV fluids. These types of fluid contain a pseudoplastic thickening agent which enables the fluid to persist for longer on the aircraft surfaces.
Methods of De-Icing/Anti-Icing 29. De-icing/anti-icing fluid is administered in either a one-step or a two-step process. The selection of one step or two steps depends on weather conditions, available equipment, available fluids, and the holdover time to be achieved. 30. One step de-icing/anti-icing is carried out using either cold or heated anti-icing fluid depending on conditions. When heated fluid is used it is applied close to the aircraft skin to minimise heat loss. The de-icing fluid will prevent re-freezing for a period of time depending on aircraft skin temperature, ambient temperature, the fluid used, the mixture strength and the weather. 31. Two-step de-icing/anti-icing. In the two step process, the first step is de-icing with an appropriate fluid for the conditions. The second step follows the first (typically within 3 minutes) before the step one fluid has time to freeze. The fluid should be administered using a spray technique which flushes away the first-step fluid and covers the surface with an adequate depth of anti-icing film.
Chapter 7 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures Note: Neither types of fluid provide the protection during flight.
Holdover Times 32.
The holdover time is achieved by the anti-icing fluid remaining on the aircraft surfaces.
In the case of a one-step de-icing/anti-icing operation the holdover time begins at the start of the operation. In a two-step operation the holdover time begins at the start of the final (anti-icing step). 33. The length of the holdover time depends on the ambient temperature, the type of fluid used and the weather conditions. Type I fluids form a thin liquid film which provides only a limited holdover time in freezing precipitation. However, no additional time is gained by increasing the concentration of the fluid in the fluid/water mix. In the case of Type II fluids the thickening agent enables the liquid to form a thicker liquid wetting film on the aircraft external surfaces. This type of fluid provides longer holder times and is more effective (than Type I) in freezing precipitation. Furthermore, the holdover time can be increased by increasing the concentration of the liquid. 34. Figure 7-1 shows a table of typical holdover times for Type I fluids in different weather conditions and ambient temperatures.
Chapter 7 Page 10
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures FIGURE 7-1 Holdover Times Type I Fluids
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
Approximate Holdover time (minimum - maximum) in minutes
°C
Frost
Freezing fog
Snow
Freezing Drizzle
Light Freezing Rain on Cold Rain Soaked Wing
>0°C
45
12-30
6-15
5-8
2-5
0 to -10
45
6-15
6-15
5-8
2-5
below -10
45
6-15
6-15
2-5
(Note, the lower time figure applies in the case of moderate precipitation and the higher figure in light precipitation.) 35.
Chapter 7 Page 11
Figure 7-2 shows an example of a holdover time table for Type II fluids.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures FIGURE 7-2 OAT
Approximate Holdover Time (minimum - maximum) in minutes
°C
Fluid mix Concentration Fluid%/Water%
Frost (hr)
Freezing Fog
Snow
Freezing Drizzle
Light Freezing Rain on Cold Rain Soaked Wing
>0
100/0
12hr
75-180
20-60
30-60
15-30
10-40
75/25
6hr
50-120
15-40
20-45
10-25
5-25
50/50
4hr
20-45
5-15
10-20
5-10
100/0
8hr
35-90
20-45
30-60
15-30
75/25
5hr
25-60
15-30
20-45
10-25
50/50
3hr
15-45
5-15
10-20
5-10
100/0
8hr
35-90
15-40
25-60
10-30
75/25
5hr
25-60
15-25
20-45
10-25
100/0
8hr
20-90
15-30
100/0
←no figures provided→
0 to -3
<-3 to -14 <-14 to -25 <-25
Note, the lower time figure applies in the case of moderate precipitation and the higher figure in light precipitation. 36.
Chapter 7 Page 12
Factors which reduce holdover times: Holdover times are likely to be reduced by: (a)
heavy precipitation or high moisture content (eg. wet snow);
(b)
high wind velocity or jet blast;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (c)
aircraft skin temperature below ambient outside air temperatures
Pre-Takeoff 37. When holdover times have been exceeded or when freezing precipitation exists, aerodynamic surfaces must be checked just prior to entering the active runway or initiating the take-off roll. If deposits of frost, ice, snow or slush are present, the de-icing/anti-icing operation must be repeated.
Additional Precautions 38. Type II fluids should be removed from flight deck windows prior to departure especially where windows are fitted with windscreen wipers. Similarly, any forward area from which fluid could flow back on to the windscreen should be cleared prior to departure. 39. De-icing/anti-icing fluid must not be sprayed directly on to brakes, wheels, exhausts or thrust reversers. Fluid must not be directed into pitot heads, static vents or angle of attack sensors. All reasonable precautions should be taken to minimise the risk of fluid entering engines, intakes/outlets and control surface cavities. 40. Some fluids may, in low humidity conditions become thicker and adversely affect the aerodynamic performance of the aircraft on take-off. If such gel residues are detected prior to departure, the surface must be cleared and re-protected as necessary.
Bird Strike Risk and Avoidance 41.
Information relating to bird strike hazard can be found: (a)
Chapter 7 Page 13
in the ICAO Bird Strike Information System (IBIS);
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (b)
on Aeronautical documents (AIP), Charts and supplements;
(c)
in ATS messages, eg. NOTAM.
42. IBIS is a reporting system designed to collect and disseminate information on bird strikes. Data on bird studies which has been supplied by Contracting States and aircraft operators to ICAO are stored on computer for ease of retrieval and analysis. 43.
The results of analysis of IBIS data are produced in four categories: (a)
bird strike record for each State;
(b)
world bird strike statistics;
(c)
state bird strike statistics;
(d)
significant bird strikes list.
44. State record. This print-out is produced annually. It lists in alphabetical order, bird strikes on or near airports, followed by bird strikes occurring off airports. Each State is also provided with a list of bird strikes on aircraft registered in the State that occur outside the territory of the State. 45. World statistics. This print-out provides an analysis of world bird strikes for the year and gives a general overview of the problem of bird strikes to aircraft. Among other data, the print-out shows numbers of strikes by bird type, aircraft, time of day and phase of flight. For example, in 1999 the highest number of strikes occurred in August; daytime was by far the most frequent time of occurrence; strikes on turbo fan aircraft (MTOM >27,000kg) accounted for two thirds of all strikes.
Chapter 7 Page 14
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 46. High risk areas. The take-off run and the approach were the most common phases of flight and the highest risk areas for bird strikes. Most strikes occurred below 100ft agl. Specific environmental factors may increase the problem by attracting birds to the area. Garbage dumps (particularly where waste products including food are dumped) and recently ploughed fields can attract large flocks of birds. On an aerodrome it is considered that short grass is more attractive to birds because it does not provide cover for ground based predators. 47. State statistics. This print-out provides an analysis of bird strikes that have occurred in one State. The information provided is similar to the world statistics. The print-out is distributed by ICAO to the State concerned if more than ten bird strikes have occurred in the year. 48. Significant bird strike list. This list is intended to bring public attention to specific bird strikes which have caused significant damage to an aircraft or affected the flight in some way. 49. Aeronautical charts. Bird sanctuaries and Spring and Autumn bird migration routes may be shown on aeronautical briefing charts and in supplements. 50. NOTAM warnings of extreme bird migration activity and of expected migration routes are published where necessary by ATS Authorities.
Commander’s Responsibility 51. The ICAO Bird Strike Reporting form should normally be completed by the pilot-incommand following an aircraft collision with a bird. The bird strike report is made even if there was no damage to the aircraft.
Chapter 7 Page 15
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Noise Abatement Procedures Operators Responsibilities 52. Under JAR-OPS an operator must establish operating procedures for noise abatement during instrument flight operations in compliance with ICAO PANS OPS Volume 1 (Doc 8168-OPS/611). 53. The take-off climb procedures for noise abatement specified by an operator for any oneaeroplane type should be the same for all aerodromes.
ICAO Procedures (DOC 8168) General 54. The pilot-in-command is always free to act as required to ensure the safe operation of the aeroplane. 55. Noise abatement procedures are not be implemented except where a need for such procedures has been determined. 56. The procedures described in DOC. 8168 show the methods for noise abatement when a problem is shown to exist. They have been designed for application to turbojet aeroplanes and they can comprise any one or more of the following: (a)
Chapter 7 Page 16
use of noise preferential runways to direct the initial and final flight paths of aeroplanes away from noise - sensitive areas;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (b)
use of noise preferential routes to assist aeroplanes in avoiding noise-sensitive areas on departure and arrival, including the use of turns to direct aeroplanes away from noisesensitive areas located under or adjacent to the usual take-off and approach flight paths; and
(c)
use of noise abatement take-off or approach procedures, designed to minimise the over-all exposure to noise on the ground and at the same time maintain the required levels of flight safety.
57. For the purpose of these procedures the heights given in metres and feet and speeds given in kilometres/hour and knots are considered to be operationally acceptable equivalents.
Noise Preferential Runways and Routes 58. Preferred runway directions for take-off and landing, appropriate to the operation, are nominated for noise abatement purposes, the objective being to utilise whenever possible those runways that permit aeroplanes to avoid noise-sensitive areas during the initial departure and final approach phases of flight. 59. Runways should not normally be selected for preferential use for landing unless they are equipped with suitable glide path guidance, eg. ILS, or visual guidance system for operations in visual meteorological conditions. 60. Noise abatement should not be the determining factor in runway nomination under the following circumstances: (a)
Chapter 7 Page 17
if the runway is not clear and dry, i.e it is adversely affected by snow, slush, ice or water, or by mud, rubber, oil or other substances;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (b)
for landing in conditions where the ceiling is lower than 150 m (500 ft) above aerodrome elevation, or for take-off and landing when the horizontal visibility is less than 1.9 km;
(c)
when the cross-wind component, including gust, exceeds 28 km/h (15 kt);
(d)
when the tail-wind component, including gusts, exceeds 9 km/h (5 kt); and
(e)
when wind shear has been reported or forecast or when thunderstorms are expected to affect the approach or departure.
61. Noise preferential routes are established to ensure that departing and arriving aeroplanes avoid overflying noise-sensitive areas in the vicinity of the aerodrome as far as practicable. In establishing noise preferential routes: (a)
turns during take-off and climb should not be required unless:
(b)
the aeroplane has reached (and can maintain throughout the turn) a height of not less than 150 m (500 ft) above terrain and the highest obstacles under the flight path;
Note. PANS-OPS, Volume II permits turns after take-off at 120 m (400 ft) and obstacle clearance of at least 90 m (300 ft) during the aeroplane’s turn. These are minimum requirements for noise abatement purposes. (c)
Chapter 7 Page 18
the bank angle for turns after take-off is limited to 15º except where adequate provision is made for an acceleration phase permitting attainment of safe speeds for bank angles greater than 15º.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (d)
no turns should be required coincident with a reduction of power associated with a noise abatement procedures; and
(e)
sufficient navigational guidance should be provided to permit aeroplanes to adhere to the designated route.
62. In establishing noise preferential routes, the safety criteria of standard departure and standard arrival routes regarding obstacle clearance climb gradients and other factors should be taken into full consideration. 63. Where noise preferential routes are established, these routes and standard departure and arrival routes should be compatible. 64.
Chapter 7 Page 19
An aeroplane should not be diverted from its assigned route unless: (a)
in the case of a departing aeroplane it has attained the altitude or height which represents the upper limit of noise abatement procedures; or
(b)
it is necessary for the safety of the aeroplane eg. for avoidance of severe weather or to resolve a traffic conflict).
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Aeroplane Operating Procedures Take-Off Procedures 65. These aeroplane operating procedures for the take-off climb have been developed so as to ensure that the necessary safety of flight operations is maintained whilst minimising exposure to noise on the ground. One of the two procedures contained in the following paragraphs should be applied routinely for all take-offs. Data available indicates that Procedure A results in noise relief during the latter part of the procedures whereas Procedure B provides relief during that part of the procedure close to the airport. The procedure selected for use will depend on the noise distribution required and the type of aeroplane involved. In unusual circumstances where neither of the two take-off climb procedures (Procedures A and B) are appropriate, a special procedure meeting the limitations may be developed. 66. The following noise abatement take-off procedures are recommended as operationally acceptable and effective in minimising noise.
Chapter 7 Page 20
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures FIGURE 7-3 Procedure ‘A’ Profile
Note. For purposes of these procedures the heights given in metres and feet, and speeds given in kilometres/hour, are considered to be the operationally acceptable equivalents. Procedure A (Figure 7-3) 67.
Take-off to 450 m (1 500 ft) above aerodrome elevation: •
Chapter 7 Page 21
Take-off power
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures •
Take-off flap
•
Climb at V2 + 20 to 40 km/h (V2 +10 to 20 kt or as limited by body angle).
At 450 m (1 500 ft): •
reduce thrust to not less than climb power/thrust.
450 m (1 500 ft) to 900 m (3 000 ft): •
climb at V2 + 20 to 40 km/h (V2 + 10 to 20 kt).
At 900 m (3 000 ft): •
Chapter 7 Page 22
accelerate smoothly to en-route climb speed with flap retraction on schedule.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures FIGURE 7-4 Procedure ‘B’ Profile
Procedure B (Figure 7-4)
Chapter 7 Page 23
•
Take-off to 300 m (1 000 ft) above aerodrome elevation:
•
take off power/thrust
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures •
take-off flap
•
climb at V2 + 20 to 40 km/h (V2 + 10 to 20 kt).
At 300 m (1 000 ft): •
maintaining a positive rate of climb, accelerate to zero flap minimum safe manoeuvring speed (VZF) retracting flap on schedule;
thereafter: reduce thrust consistent with the following: (a)
for high bypass ratio engines reduce to normal climb power/thrust;
(b)
for low bypass ratio engines, reduce power/thrust to below normal climb thrust but not less than that necessary to maintain the final take-off engine-out climb gradient; and
(c)
for aeroplanes with slow flap retracting reduce power/thrust at an intermediate flap setting:
thereafter: From 300 m (1 000 ft) to 900 m (3 000 ft): •
continue climb at not greater than VZF + 20 km/h (VZF + 10 kt).
At 900 m (3 000 ft): •
Chapter 7 Page 24
accelerate smoothly to en-route climb speed.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 68. Any special procedure developed must be shown to be necessary and meet certain limitations. Its safety must be shown to be equivalent to that of Procedures A and B. Before a special procedure is introduced its specific characteristics and its effect on standardisation of crew procedures and cockpit workload should be considered.
Safety Limitations 69.
Chapter 7 Page 25
The following limitations shall be observed: (a)
the minimum steady climb-out speed shall not be less than V2 + 20 km/h (V2 + 10 kt) or less than that prescribed in the aeroplane flight manual, if that is greater;
(b)
observance of the minimum steady climb-out speed shall not be required if this causes the maximum acceptable body angle to be exceeded; and
(c)
power reductions shall not be required unless: (i)
the aeroplane has reached a height of at least 300 m (1000 ft) above aerodrome elevation;
(ii)
a standard power setting is used which is sufficient for the aeroplane to maintain, at the maximum certificated take-off mass, a steady gradient or climb of not less than 4% at a speed obtained from a) and b) above; and
(iii)
the take-off flight path, both with all engines operating and after making due allowance for the possibility of engine failure and for the period required to obtain full power from the remaining engine(s), ensures clearance of all obstacles under the flight path by an adequate margin.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures NOTE: It should be assumed that before reaching the noise-sensitive area the aeroplane will climb at a maximum gradient consistent with the maintenance of a speed not less than that obtained from application of a) or b) above.
Approach Procedures In noise abatement approach procedures: (a)
the aeroplane shall not be required to be in any configuration other than the final landing configuration at any point after passing the outer marker or 5 NM from the threshold of the runway of intended landing, whichever is earlier; and
(b)
excessive rates of descent shall not be required.
70. When it is necessary to develop a noise abatement approach procedure based on currently available systems and equipment, the following safety considerations shall be taken fully into account: (a)
Chapter 7 Page 26
glide path or approach angles should not require an approach to be made: (i)
above the ILS glide path angle:
(ii)
above the glide path angle of the visual approach slope indicator system;
(iii)
above the normal PAR final approach angle; and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (iv)
above an angle of 3º except where it has been necessary to establish, for operational purposes, an ILS with a glide path angle greater than 3º;
Note. The pilot can accurately maintain a prescribed angle of approach only when provided with either continuous visual or radio navigational guidance. (b)
the pilot should not be required to complete a turn on to a final approach at distances less than will: (i)
in the case of visual operations, permit an adequate period of stabilised flight on final approach before crossing the runway threshold;
(ii)
in the case of instrument approaches, permit the aircraft to be established on final approach prior to interception of the glide path.
or
71. Within the constraints necessary at some locations to maintain efficient air traffic services, noise abatement descent and approach procedures utilising continuous descent and reduced power/ reduced drag techniques (or a combination or both) have proved to be both effective and operationally acceptable. The objective of such procedures is to achieve uninterrupted descents at reduced power and with reduced drag, by delaying the extension of wing flaps and landing gear until the final stages of approach. The speeds employed during the application of these techniques tend, accordingly, to be higher than would be appropriate for descent and approach with the flaps and gear extended throughout, and such procedures must therefore comply with the limitations in this section. 72. Compliance with published noise abatement approach procedures should not be required in adverse operating conditions such as:
Chapter 7 Page 27
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (a)
if the runway is not clear and dry, ie. it is adversely affected by snow, slush, ice or water, or by mud, rubber, oil or other substances;
(b)
in conditions when the ceiling is lower than 150 m (500 ft) above aerodrome elevation, or when the horizontal visibility is less than 1.9 km;
(c)
when the cross-wind component, including gusts, exceeds 28km/h(15kt);
(d)
when the tail-wind component, including gusts, exceeds 9 km/h (5 kt); and
(e)
when wind shear has been reported or forecast or when adverse weather conditions, e.g. thunderstorms, are expected to affect the approach.
Landing Procedures 73. Noise abatement procedures shall not contain a prohibition of use of reverse thrust during landing. 74. The practice of using a displaced runway threshold as a noise abatement measure shall not be employed unless aircraft noise is significantly reduced by such use and the runway length remaining is safe and sufficient for all operational requirements.
Fire and Smoke Procedures Regulation and Guidance 75. ICAO Annex 8 contains airworthiness standards concerning aircraft design with respect to fire protection. The general requirements to meet these standards are:
Chapter 7 Page 28
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (a)
cabin furnishing must be of a type which minimises the possibility of in-flight and ground fires;
(b)
the material used in cabin furnishing must, in the event of fire, minimise the production of smoke and toxic gases;
(c)
means must be provided to contain or detect and extinguish such fires, so that no additional danger to the aeroplane is caused;
(d)
design precautions must be taken to protect the occupants against the presence of smoke or other toxic gases in the cabin.
76. Annex 8 also prescribes standards for fire protection in the region of powerplants. Because of the increased fire risk in these areas, they must be isolated from other regions of the aeroplane by fire resistant material. In addition, fuel and other flammable fluid system components must be located in regions capable of containing the fluid when exposed to fire conditions. The crew must also have the means of shutting off the flow of fuel/fluid in the event of a fire. Sufficient fire detectors must be provided so as to ensure rapid detection of a fire in the area of a powerplant and extinguishing systems must be provided where a fire cannot be safely contained. 77. Specific requirements concerning fire and smoke detection and fire fighting equipment are contained in JAR-OPS and appropriate Joint Airworthiness Regulations (JAR 25, 23 etc). 78. The Operations Manual is required to contain details of abnormal and emergency procedures as well as flight procedures concerned with cabin safety.
Chapter 7 Page 29
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Fire Detection Systems 79. On civil transport aircraft the engine compartments are usually divided into fire zones. Those in which the likelihood of fire is greatest are protected by warning and extinguisher systems. Others, such as jet pipe surrounds, may only be fitted with overheat warning systems. 80. Equipment bays and baggage compartments are usually protected by smoke detection equipment and areas adjacent to hot air ducts usually contain excess temperature detectors. 81. Auxiliary Power Units (APUs) have similar fire detection and extinguishing equipment to the main engines, but usually incorporating automatic shut-down. 82. Fire detector signals activate warning lamps and/or captions on the flight deck and often audible warnings also. Fire warning lamps conventionally give a steady red indication. All detection systems include functional test circuits and many are of a sophisticated type which monitor temperature trends in engine bays. There is normally one warning lamp for each engine, but the warning bell will be activated by any detection circuit. 83.
Detection equipment falls into two main categories, unit and continuous types.
84. Unit type detectors usually employ either thermocouples or switches which are operated by differential expansion of metals. Unit detectors are used to monitor specific points where excessive temperatures might occur, continuous detectors are routed around a potential fire zone to provide maximum coverage. 85. Continuous wire detectors consist of a co-axial cable in which the central conducting core is insulated from the outer, earthed, sheath by a temperature sensitive material. These detectors may be of either the capacitive or resistive variety.
Chapter 7 Page 30
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 86. Resistive continuous detectors make use of the decrease in resistance of the insulation with increasing temperature, which will eventually allow current to flow from core to sheath and activate a warning circuit. The disadvantage of these detectors is that a short-circuit between core and sheath due to crushing or chafing will cause them to initiate a spurious fire warning. 87. Capacitive continuous detectors use the increase of capacitance which occurs with increased temperature. The increase of stored charge, and therefore discharge, with increased temperature creates a back emf and current which eventually is sufficient to activate the warning circuit. If a capacitive detector is short-circuited it may cease to act as a capacitor, but does not produce a spurious fire warning.
Types of Fire Extinguishant 88.
Chapter 7 Page 31
There are five types of fire extinguishant in general use: (a)
Water. Colour code RED. Water works by cooling the burning material and is suitable for ordinary combustibles such as paper, wood, cloth etc. Water must not be used on electrical equipment or fires in fuel or oil. (Water extinguishers can be used after non-electrical fires have been extinguished to provide cooling and prevent reignition).
(b)
Carbon Dioxide. Colour code BLACK. Carbon dioxide gas works by smothering the fire (denying it oxygen) and is suitable for fires in electric motors, or electrical equipment.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (c)
Halon. Colour code GREEN. Halon 1211 is bromochlorodifluoromethane (BCF). Halon works by the vapourising liquid gas chemically inhibiting combustion (effectively smothering the fire). It is suitable for use on electrical equipment fires and is used extensively as an aircraft cabin extinguishant and as an engine fire extinguishant. Halon is toxic and can be harmful to users in confined spaces.
(d)
Dry Powder. Colour code BLUE. Dry powder works by smothering the fire with a blanket of powder and chemically inhibits combustion. It is used on electrical equipment but is limited by its inability to penetrate inside equipment. Dry powder is not used in aircraft.
(e)
Foam. Colour code CREAM. Foam extinguishant can be either fluoroprotein foam (FP) or aqueous film forming foam (AFFF). The foam forms a blanket over the surface of burning liquid and smothers the fire. Foam is used externally in fighting aircraft fires and fuel fires but is not used inside aircraft where the foam may come into contact with live electrical equipment.
Engine and Carburettor Fire Carburettor Fire 89. The region of the carburettor is the most likely location for a piston engine aeroplane to experience an engine fire. Such a fire is possible during engine starting when a backfire can ignite fuel accumulated in the inlet manifold and carburettor throat. The fire is likely to be evident when flames are emitted from the air intake. The appropriate procedure is: (a)
Chapter 7 Page 32
shut off the fuel supply; and,
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (b)
continue motoring the engine with the starter motor until the fire has been drawn into the engine and extinguished in the manifold;
(c)
if the fire persists, a carbon dioxide ( CO ) or BCF extinguisher should be discharged, by the ground crew, into the intake, while the engine is being turned by the starter motor, until the fire is extinguished.
2
90. The most likely cause of carburettor fire is excessive priming to start, leading to excess fuel in the inlet manifold, and faulty valve timing leading to backfiring.
Engine Fire 91. All gas turbine engines and their associated installation systems incorporate a fire protection system for the detection and rapid extinguishing of fire. A detection system is provided on the engine to sense an overheat condition or the occurrence of a fire and give warning on the flight deck. The detector system can consist of either a number of detector units located in strategic positions, or a continuous sensing element. 92. The occurrence of a fire is indicated on the flight deck by a steady RED warning light and alarm bell. The red light will usually indicate the location of the fire and the alarm bell can be silenced by a cut-out switch, leaving the light remaining. Each engine is covered by its own warning system and is provided with an extinguishing system, which is often doubled up, either by the use of more than one fire bottle or the optional use of another engine’s fire bottle.
Actions Required 93.
Chapter 7 Page 33
In the event of engine fire, the typical actions required are:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (a)
move thrust lever to close;
(b)
move HP cock to cut-off;
(c)
pull engine fire switch;
(d)
if engine fire switch remains illuminated, discharge fire bottle;
(e)
after 30 seconds, if engine fire switch remains illuminated, discharge second fire bottle.
94. A discharge device, often called a squib, is fitted between the fire bottle and its discharge line. The squib consists of a breakable disc and a small explosive charge which is electrically detonated to break the disc and discharge the contents of the bottle.
Auxillary Power Unit (APU) Fire 95. Power plants and APU’s use fixed fire extinguishing installations consisting of pressurised extinguishant containers, distribution piping and operating controls. 96. A single fire extinguisher bottle is provided for the APU. Pulling the APU fire switch arms the squib, which is fired by rotating the switch in either direction.
Engine Fire Extinguishants 97. The types of extinguishant are usually toxic or semi-toxic Freon compounds such as methyl bromide (MB), Halon 1211 (bromochlorodifluoromethane (BCF)) and bromotriflouromethane (BTM).
Chapter 7 Page 34
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Types of Portable (Hand) Fire Extinguishers 98. Portable (hand) extinguishers in aircraft use either CO2, water or Halon (or equivalent) as the extinguishant. The type of extinguisher chosen for a particular location will contain an extinguishant suitable for the type of fire to be expected in that compartment. Extinguishers should be easily accessible and are therefore retained in brackets by quick-release fittings. 99. CO2 extinguishers are particularly suitable for electrical fires. The released CO2 gas excludes two of the three components required for combustion, namely heat and oxygen (the third being fuel). Because of its rapid cooling effect, CO2 can cause damage if used on an engine fire. 100. Halon (BCF) extinguishers are suitable for all types of fires and are therefore widely used in aircraft. The disadvantages of Halon are that, once heated by the fire that it is tackling, it gives off noxious gases. Also, Halon does not cool the fire-affected area, and it is therefore necessary to employ a a follow-up action to cool the area and prevent re-ignition of the fire, either with a water extinguisher (or a convenient coffee pot!).
Cabin Fire Protection 101. A fire occurring within the cockpit or passenger compartment presents an immediate and direct threat to the safety of the crew and occupants and must be tackled without delay. The additional hazard from smoke or toxic fumes means that the flight crew and crew must have protective breathing equipment (PBE) readily available. Sufficient fire extinguishers of the correct type must be provided as well as other equipment (fire axe, fire blanket, gloves).
Chapter 7 Page 35
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures Number of Hand Held Fire Extinguishers 102. An operator is not permitted by JAR-OPS to operate an aeroplane unless hand fire extinguishers are provided for use in crew, passenger, and as applicable, cargo compartments and galleys in accordance with the following:
Chapter 7 Page 36
(a)
Type and quantity of extinguishing agent. The type and quantity of extinguishing agent must be suitable for the kinds of fires likely to occur and must minimise the hazard of toxic gas concentration;
(b)
At least one Halon 1211 hand extinguisher or equivalent must be conveniently located on the flight deck;
(c)
At least one hand fire extinguisher must be located in, or readily accessible for use in, each galley not located on the main passenger deck;
(d)
At least the following number of hand fire extinguishers must be conveniently located in the passenger compartment(s):
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures Maximum Approved Passenger Seating
Number of Extinguishers
7 - 30
1
31 - 60
2
61 - 200
3
201 - 300
4
301 - 400
5
401 - 500
6
(Note. When two or more extinguishers are required, they must be evenly distributed). (i)
Where the passenger seating is 31 - 60, at least one of the extinguishers must contain Halon 1211 or equivalent as the extinguishing agent;
(ii)
Where the passenger seating is 61 or more, at least two of the fire extinguishers must contain Halon 1211 or equivalent as the extinguishing agent
Crash Axes and Crowbars 103. The operator of an aeroplane of MTOM >5700kg or having a maximum approved passenger seating of >9 seats is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that it is equipped with: (a)
Chapter 7 Page 37
at least one crash axe or crowbar located on the flight deck; and
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (b)
if the maximum approved passenger seating is >200, an additional crash axe or crowbar must be located in or near the most rearward galley area.
104. Crash axes and crowbars located in the passenger compartment must not be visible to passengers.
Types of Smoke Detectors 105. Freight holds, baggage compartments and equipment bays are fitted with smoke detectors which sample the air in the compartment and activate an alarm if certain parameters are exceeded. Smoke detectors are of four main types:
Chapter 7 Page 38
(a)
Photo-electric cells. These detect the diffusion of a abeam of light which occurs when the beam is interrupted by smoke. The scattering of the light increases the conductance of the cell and its output is amplified to operate a warning circuit.
(b)
Alpha particle detectors. These are ionisation chambers which measure alpha radiation from radium. Alpha particles are absorbed by smoke, which reduces the ionisation current of the device, to operate an alarm.
(c)
Visual smoke indicators. These are usually only fitted as alarm verification devices.
(d)
Carbon monoxide detectors. Found mainly in aircraft of American manufacture, these devices detect concentration of CO and activate a warning system.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 106. Smoke detectors fitted in the toilet compartments of passenger aircraft provide an aural warning to alert the cabin crew, they are fully automatic and operate from the aircraft’s 28vDC power supply. The detector unit displays a green light to indicate that power is being supplied to it and a large red display illuminates in conjunction with the aural warning when smoke is detected. A reset switch enables cancellation of the warning, but the alarm will sound again if smoke is still present.
Problems Associated with Smoke 107. Smoke may contain toxic gases including carbon monoxide which can quickly incapacitate the flight crew. In addition, smoke can reduce visibility to the extent that it becomes impossible to read flight instruments.
Protective Breathing Equipment 108. JAR-OPS requires all commercial aircraft of MTOM >5700kg or passenger seating of >19, from 1 April 2000, to be equipped with protective breathing equipment (PBE) to provide smoke detection for eyes, nose and mouth and to provide oxygen for at least 15 minutes. In the cockpit, PBE must be located at each flight crew duty station and must be easily accessible for immediate use.
Smoke in the Cockpit - Actions 109. In the event of indications of electrical fire or smoke in the cockpit, the typical immediate actions required are:
Chapter 7 Page 39
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
110.
(a)
crew don oxygen masks;
(b)
check supply to ‘on’ and diluter lever to 100%
(c)
put on smoke goggles (if required);
(d)
confirm crew communications.
}
or put on PBE
Subsequent actions depend on the circumstances and appropriate safety drills.
Air Conditioning Smoke Actions 111. If smoke is detected in the output of the air conditioning system, the following represents a typical list of immediate actions:
Chapter 7 Page 40
(a)
crew don oxygen masks;
(b)
check supply to ‘on’ and diluter lever to 100%;
(c)
put on smoke goggles (if required);
(d)
confirm crew communications;
(e)
open all air conditioning pack valves;
(f)
select humidifier switches to ‘off’
(g)
switch off flight deck and recirculating fans (if installed).
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
}
or put on PBE
Special Operational Procedures 112.
Subsequent actions depend on circumstances and appropriate standard drills.
Smoke in the Passenger Cabin and Toilets 113. The additional problem presented by smoke in the passenger compartment, apart from the distress caused to passengers themselves is the need for the cabin crew to be able to move around either to supervise emergency drills or to fight a fire. To this end, JAR-OPS requires commercial aircraft as described in paragraph 94, to be equipped with portable PBE, sufficient for all required cabin crew. The PBE must be installed adjacent to each duty station. 114.
Additionally, a portable PBE must be located next to the fire extinguisher in each galley.
115. The toilet compartments present additional problems because the space is unsupervised and also because of the need for waste (paper) containers. In addition to warning passengers not to smoke in the toilet compartment, smoke detection and fire suppression devices are required. On large commercial aeroplanes, JAR requires that each lavatory is equipped with a smoke detector system which provides a warning light in the cockpit or provides a warning light or audible warning which could be detected by a cabin attendant. In addition, each lavatory must be equipped with a built in fire extinguisher which will discharge automatically into each waste receptacle in the event of a fire. 116.
PBEs must permit communication by intercom, radio and by megaphone when required.
Cargo Compartments 117. The presence of smoke and fire in cargo or baggage compartments introduces additional problems because of accessibility and location, the variation of materials carried and the risk of the fire spreading.
Chapter 7 Page 41
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 118. JAR-OPS requires that a commercial aircraft is equipped with an easily accessible portable PBE located outside but near to the entrance to a cargo compartment. 119. Cargo compartments are classified for fire detection and suppression purposes, in accordance with the following requirements: (a)
(b)
(c)
Class A. A Class A cargo or baggage compartment is one in which: (i)
the presence of a fire would easily be discovered by a crew member at a duty station; and
(ii)
each part of the compartment is easily accessible in flight.
Class B. A Class B cargo or baggage compartment is one in which: (i)
there is sufficient access in flight to enable a crew member to reach any part of the compartment with the contents of a hand held fire extinguisher; and,
(ii)
during access, no hazardous quantity of smoke, flames or extinguishing agent will enter the cabin or flight crew compartments;
(iii)
there is a separate approved smoke or fire detector system to give warning to the pilot or flight engineer station.
Class C. A Class C cargo or baggage compartment is one which does not meet the requirements of A or B but in which: (i)
Chapter 7 Page 42
there is remote indication at the pilot or flight engineer station of a fire detected in the compartment; and,
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
(d)
(e)
Chapter 7 Page 43
(ii)
there is an approved built in fire extinguishing system, controllable by the pilot or flight engineer and hazardous quantities of smoke, etc. are prevented from entering the cabin;
(iii)
ventilation can be controlled to allow the fire extinguishant to have an effect.
Class D. A Class D cargo of baggage compartment is one in which: (i)
a fire in it will be contained without endangering the safety of the aeroplane or occupants;
(ii)
hazardous smoke etc. is excluded from the cabin;
(iii)
ventilation of the compartment can be controlled to prevent fire from spreading;
(iv)
the heating of adjacent critical areas has been taken into consideration;
(v)
the volume of the compartment is 1000 cubic feet or less.
Class E. A Class E cargo compartment is one on aeroplanes used only for the carriage of cargo and in which: (i)
there is a separate approved smoke or fire detector system to give warning to the pilot or flight engineer station;
(ii)
ventilating airflow in the cargo bay can be controlled from the crew compartment;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (iii)
there are means to exclude hazardous quantities of smoke etc. from the flight crew compartment; and,
(iv)
the required crew emergency exits are accessible under any cargo loading condition.
Overheated Brakes after Landing or Abandoned Take-Off 120. Brakes on modern large aeroplanes are fitted with overheat warnings but not fire extinguishers. The principal hazard which is present in fighting a brake fire on the ground is that of an explosion brought about by sudden cooling caused by the fire extinguishant. For this reason brake fires should be extinguished wherever possible using dry powder, or as a last resort, foam. 2
Water or CO extinguishers should never be used to fight brake fires. 121. If a wheel explodes, the majority of the blast is likely to be outwards from the hubs/axle area. Personnel fighting brake fires should therefore approach the wheels in a fore/aft direction avoiding the sides as far as possible. 122. The precise brake overheat drill depends on aircraft type but in general the handling pilot will bring the aircraft to rest as soon as practicable. Emergency services should be alerted quickly and the possibility of aircraft evacuation considered. The Operations Manual will contain more specific guidance on the actions required
Chapter 7 Page 44
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Decompression of the Pressurised Cabin Requirement for Supplemental Oxygen 123. Pressurised commercial aeroplanes are required to be equipped with oxygen equipment such that in the event of a decompression occurring the flight crew, cabin crew and passengers can be supplied with supplemental oxygen for a specified minimum time. 124. The operator of aeroplanes which operate at pressure altitudes above 10,000ft is required, by JAR-OPS, to ensure that such aeroplanes are equipped to provide the specified amount of supplemental oxygen when needed. 125. The amount of supplemental oxygen that must be available is calculated on the basis of the cabin pressure altitude, the flight duration, and the assumption that the decompression will occur at the most critical altitude and time. It is assumed that after a pressurisation failure, the pilot will descend the aeroplane, in accordance with emergency procedures specified in the aeroplane flight manual (AFM) to a safe altitude from which the flight may continue safely to destination or alternate. Supplemental oxygen must be available to provide adequately for this profile.
Flight Crew 126. The minimum amount of supplemental oxygen which is specified by JAR-OPS for flight crew positions is sufficient for the entire flight time when the cabin altitude exceeds 13,000ft and the entire flight time when it exceeds 10,000ft but does not exceed 13,000ft after the first 30 minutes at higher altitudes but, in no case must it be less than: (a)
Chapter 7 Page 45
30 minutes, for aeroplanes certificated to fly at altitudes not exceeding 25,000ft; or,
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures (b)
2 hours, for aeroplanes certificated to fly at altitudes greater than 25,000ft.
Cabin Crew 127. The minimum amount of supplemental oxygen which is specified by JAR-OPS for cabin crew members is: (a)
sufficient for the entire flight time when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 13,000ft but, not less than 30 minutes; and,
(b)
sufficient for the entire flight time when cabin pressure altitude is greater than 10, 000ft but does not exceed 13,000ft after the first 30 minutes at higher altitudes.
Passengers 128. A supplemental oxygen supply is specified for certain proportions of the passengers depending on the possible flight profile and cabin altitude, for example:
Chapter 7 Page 46
(a)
when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 15,000ft, the supply must provide for 100% of the passengers for the entire flight time, but not less than 10 minutes;
(b)
when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 14,000ft but does not exceed 15,000ft, the supply must provide for 30% of the passengers for the entire flight time;
(c)
when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 10,000ft but does not exceed 14,000ft after the first 30 minutes at higher altitudes, the supply must provide for 10% of the passengers for the entire flight time.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures
Types of Decompression Slow Decompression 129. A slow decompression is gradual reduction of cabin pressure and loss of pressure differential which is not immediately obvious to the crew. Cabin pressure altitude will increase and eventually activate the cabin altitude warning device. 130. A slow decompression can be caused by a malfunction in the automatic cabin pressure controller or an associated system (such as hydraulic leak which activates the undercarriage ‘squat’ switch and opens the outflow valves as if the aeroplane was on the ground). 131. The effects of a slow increase in pressure altitude to above 10,000ft is unlikely to very obvious to the passengers however the gradual onset of hypoxia is certain. The most active crew members are likely to be affected first. The initial symptoms are slight with minor behavioural changes (affected persons frequently become euphoric), judgement and self criticism reduce, a shortness of breath may become noticeable and at altitudes above about 12,000ft a severe headache may develop after about 20 minutes. As the hypoxia continues, mental and physical co-ordination degrade until ultimately the persons becomes unable to help themselves. 132. The time from the initial exposure to hypoxia that a person has available to assess and act on the situation is known as the time of useful consciousness. This period of time reduces rapidly with altitude and amount of activity required and is reduced markedly when the hypoxia results from a rapid decompression. 133.
Approximate times of useful consciousness are:
about 30 minutes at 18,000ft,
Chapter 7 Page 47
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 2 – 3 minutes at 25,000ft, 30 – 60 seconds at 30,000ft, 15 – 30 seconds at 35,000ft. But, note, these times are likely to be halved when the decompression is rapid.
Rapid Decompression 134. A rapid decompression is the complete and sudden loss of cabin pressure. (Some authorities describe a rapid decompression as one in which cabin altitude reverts to an altitude above 20,000ft within 1.5 minutes). 135. The effects of the sudden decompression depend initially on the cause and especially the size of the rupture or hole in the pressure hull. A rapid decompression is likely to be accompanied by the sound of rushing air combined with the dense misting of the cabin as the pressure drop causes adiabatic cooling of the air and subsequent condensation. Persons on board are likely to suffer otic barotrauma and/or sinus barotrauma as ears and sinuses are unable to cope with the sudden pressure changes and depending on altitude, hypoxia will affect everyone not on oxygen. Cabin pressurisation instruments should indicate the extent of the pressure loss and audible warning is likely to be activated. The cabin pressure may reduce below ambient pressure due to aerodynamic suction.
Chapter 7 Page 48
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Special Operational Procedures 136. On large aeroplanes certificated to operate above 30,000ft, drop-down oxygen masks should operate automatically when cabin pressure altitude reaches a pre-set level (typically before reaching 15,000ft), but it has been estimated that less than 50% of passengers will not be able or know how to operate them (the mandatory pre-flight briefing notwithstanding). The crew must therefore have portable oxygen sets at or near to their crew station so that they can be on oxygen rapidly and able to assist passengers. 137. On aeroplanes operating at pressure altitudes above 25,000ft the flight crew oxygen masks must be of the quick donning type, and must be within immediate reach of flight crew members when at their duty stations. 138. The drill for the flight crew is to immediately don the oxygen mask at their position, check that oxygen is flowing and then establish communication and deal with the emergency using the approved check list as contained in the Operations Manual. 139. Subsequent actions depend on the circumstances but, in general, if the pressure loss cannot be contained, the aeroplane will be descended to a safe but lower altitude and a diversion carried out to the nearest suitable alternate aerodrome. Note. Information on oxygen requirements for unpressurised aircraft is contained in Chapter 2, Paragraph 45 (ICAO Annex 6).
Chapter 7 Page 49
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Windshear
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear
8
Windshear
Background 1. Windshear is caused by variations in the direction and/or speed of the local wind with changes in height and/or horizontal distance, it is almost always present but normally does not cause undue difficulty to the pilot. It is the abnormal windshear that is dangerous. Short-term fluctuations in the wind (gusts) are common at low altitudes, and are unlikely to cause prolonged excursions from the intended flight path and target air speed. If these gusts are large and prolonged their effect on an aircraft may be similar to that caused by a windshear. 2. Windshear tends to displace an aircraft abruptly from its intended flight profile such that substantial control action is required.
Definition of Terms Used in Windshear 3. Low altitude windshear. This type of windshear is experienced along the final approach path or during the initial climb-out flight path. 4. Types of windshear. The following definitions are used in order to differentiate between three distinct types of windshear: (a)
Chapter 8 Page 1
Vertical windshear. The change of horizontal wind vector with height (as might be determined by two or more anemometers at different heights on a mast).
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear (b)
Horizontal windshear. The change of horizontal wind vector with horizontal distance (as might be determined by two or more anemometers mounted at the same height but at different locations).
(c)
Updraught/downdraught shear. Changes in the vertical component of wind with horizontal distance.
Meteorological Features Associated with Windshear 5. The main defence against windshear is avoidance and therefore it is necessary to recognise the meteorological features which cause, or are associated with it. These are:
Chapter 8 Page 2
(a)
Thunderstorms (especially at the mature stage) and large cumulonimbus;
(b)
The passage of warm, cold or occluded fronts;
(c)
A marked temperature inversion;
(d)
A low level wind maximum or turbulent boundary layer;
(e)
Strong turbulence at the surface, especially when reinforced by strong winds and unfavourable topography or buildings.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear Thunderstorm 6. Figure 8-1 illustrates the two aspects of a thunderstorm most relevant to windshear. The downdraught or, in a severe storm the microburst, is an area where very potent downdraught windshear can be experienced. The cold air flows outwards close to the surface as a gust front, perhaps reaching 32 km from the storm, or further in the case of several storms forming a squall line. The vertical extent of this outflow may be 6000 ft and flying through it or descending into it is likely to result in vertical windshear.
Chapter 8 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear FIGURE 8-1 Air Flow Under and Near a Thunderstorm
Chapter 8 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear Passage of a Front 7. Vertical windshear can be present whenever an aircraft climbs or descends through a weather front. The more active the front the greater the risk of windshear. A front which is moving at 30 kt or more and across which there is a temperature difference of 5°C or more, or at which a sharp change in wind direction occurs, is likely to produce serious windshear problems. A vigorous cold front is likely to pose the greatest risk. The position of the aerodrome in relation to the surface position of the front is important. When landing (or taking off) at an aerodrome up to 30 nm ahead of a warm front or 20 nm or less behind a cold front the greatest risk of windshear exists, as shown at Figure 8-2. Crossing a front in level flight can result in horizontal windshear, which could present a problem at low level, for example during the early stages of a missed approach, where windshear induced changes in airspeed and/or rates of climb may well be masked by the changing aircraft configuration. 8. A sea breeze front is unlikely to create significant windshear problems, however the presence of such a front may well distort the outflow of air from a coastal thunderstorm and increase the severity of the windshear.
Chapter 8 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear FIGURE 8-2 Areas of Windshear associated with an Approach Path through a warm and cold front
Chapter 8 Page 6
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear Inversions 9. A low level inversion effectively prevents mixing and decouples the retarded surface flow from the free stream air above the inversion. The shear boundary can be very low, especially on a cold clear winter night. Climbing or descending through such an inversion can give significant vertical windshear at a critical stage of flight, which is one reason why marked inversion warnings are issued at major aerodromes.
Low Level Wind Maximum 10. Low level wind maximums (sometimes referred to as low level jets) can occur near the top of an inversion, possibly in association with a nearby ridge or higher ground. Windshear may be encountered when passing through this wind maximum.
Turbulence 11. Strong mean surface winds usually generate greater differences between the gusts and lulls and may therefore result in windshear. In hotter climates intense surface heating can give rise to updraught/downdraught windshear. Significant changes in wind direction can also result from air flowing over or around obstacles as large as mountains or as small as hangars. Climbing or descending in the lee of high ground when the wind is strong can be particularly hazardous.
Indications and Warnings 12. It is possible that visual warnings of the likely presence of windshear may be seen, these include: (a)
Chapter 8 Page 7
The topography.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear (b)
Smoke rising and levelling off, indicating an inversion.
(c)
Mist, fog or frost, again indicating an inversion.
(d)
A marked haze layer, again indicating an inversion.
(e)
Cumulonimbus clouds or active thunderstorms.
(f)
Wind indicators at different locations on the aerodrome showing differing wind velocities.
13. Another valuable indication of the possible presence of windshear is a significant difference between the aircraft computed wind velocity and the surface wind velocity given by ATC. In this respect INS based systems are of value since INS gives an instantaneous wind velocity. 14. Aerodrome Reports. Any pilots reports of windshear encounters are passed on to other traffic by ATC. However, some aerodromes forecast windshear. Within the UK only two aerodromes (Heathrow and Belfast Aldergrove) currently give windshear warnings in addition to marked inversion warnings. However, all ATC units are likely to relay reports of windshear which have been passed to them by pilots.
Measuring and Warning Systems for Low Level Windshear Airborne Systems 15. It is assessed that a pilot needs 10 to 40 seconds of warning to avoid windshear. Fewer than 10 seconds is not enough time to react, while more than 40 is too long, atmospheric conditions can change in that time. Three advance warning systems are under development:
Chapter 8 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear (a)
Microwave radar. A Microwave radar signal is projected ahead of the aircraft to detect raindrops and other moisture particles. The returning signal represents the motion of those raindrops and moisture particles, and this is translated into wind speed. Microwave radar works better than other systems in rain but less well in dry conditions. Because it points toward the ground as the plane lands, it picks up interfering ground returns, or ‘clutter.’
(b)
Doppler LIDAR. A laser system called Doppler LIDAR (light detecting and ranging) reflects energy from ‘aerosols’ (minute particles) instead of raindrops. This system can avoid picking up ground clutter (moving cars, etc.) and thus has fewer interfering signals. However, it does not work as well in heavy rain.
(c)
Infra-red. This system uses an infra-red detector to measure temperature changes ahead of the aircraft. The system monitors the thermal signatures of carbon dioxide to look for cool columns of air, which can be a characteristic of microbursts. This system is less costly and not as complex as others, but does not directly measure wind speeds.
Windshear-Alert Systems Using Ground-Based Radar 16. A Low-Level Wind-Shear Alert System (LLWAS) has been installed on the ground at more than 100 U.S. airports. Wind speed and directional sensors report to a central computer, and controllers can alert pilots in the event that windshear is detected. But such systems cannot forecast windshear.
Chapter 8 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear ATC Radars 17. Radars which are used for air traffic control purposes are designed to eliminate or reduce returns from weather. However, some specialised radars are specifically designed to detect the different air currents associated with thunderstorms in particular. This type of Doppler radar is being used more now to detect potential windshear situations.
The Effects of Windshear 18. The effects of a gradual change in headwind component on an aircraft’s approach or climb out gradient are well known. For example on the approach to land a decrease in headwind allows the groundspeed to increase and the descent gradient is reduced. An increase in headwind increases the descent gradient. Similarly for an aircraft climbing after take-off a gradual decrease in headwind will reduce the climb gradient. An increase in headwind resulting in a steeper climb gradient. However, when such changes occur suddenly, as is the case with windshear, the effects can be quite different. The effect of the inertia of the aircraft as it encounters the change in wind component manifests itself as an energy loss or energy gain, the effects of which are described in the following paragraphs.
Chapter 8 Page 10
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear Energy Loss 19. An aircraft encountering windshear tends to maintain its speed over the ground due to its own momentum (the larger the aircraft the more momentum it will have). If the windshear is due to a reduction in headwind component (or increase in tailwind component) this reduction manifests itself as an energy loss and a reduction in indicated airspeed (and TAS). Lift is therefore reduced and the aircraft will, without correction, suffer a loss of height and an increase in rate of descent and descent gradient. This situation is illustrated at Figure 8-3. In a climb situation the aircraft will experience a decrease in rate of climb and climb gradient.
FIGURE 8-3 Effect of the Loss of Wind Speed during Descent
Energy Gain 20. An increase in headwind component (or decrease in the tailwind component) results in an energy gain and increase in indicated airspeed, as shown at Figure 8-4. For an aircraft in a climb, the effects of the energy gain are to increase the rate of climb and the climb gradient. In the case of an approach to landing the descent gradient would be decreased.
Chapter 8 Page 11
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear FIGURE 8-4 Effect of the Increase in Windspeed during the Climb
These events become critical when the aircraft is being flown close to the ground during the final stages of an approach or shortly after take-off. In the energy loss case the engine reaction time when additional power is applied can be critical. 21. The energy gain/loss situations described above can occur as a result of either vertical windshear or as horizontal windshear, in other words the aircraft can either climb/descend or fly horizontally into air flowing at a different speed or from a different direction, in either event changing the head/tail wind component. In simple terms a change in the head/tail wind component will (in the short term) change the airspeed rather than the groundspeed of the aircraft.
Chapter 8 Page 12
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear Downdraught 22. Figure 8-5 shows an aircraft taking off in the vicinity of a thunderstorm. The situation illustrated is the critical case where the headwind component decreases sharply and/or becomes a tailwind component shortly after take-off (energy loss). In this case, because of inertia, the groundspeed remains constant but the airspeed decreases sharply. The loss of lift associated with the resulting low airspeed may cause the aircraft to strike the ground.
FIGURE 8-5 Take-off in Downdraught Conditions
Chapter 8 Page 13
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear Approach Under Thunderstorm 23. At Figure 8-6 an aircraft is approaching to land in the vicinity of a thunderstorm. Initially, at position A, the aircraft is stabilised on a 3° glideslope and is maintaining target airspeed. As the aircraft enters the gust front the previous slight tailwind component becomes a marked headwind component but, because of inertia, the groundspeed will momentarily remain constant. As a result the airspeed increases by an amount equal to the change in wind component. The amount of lift generated increases with the increased airspeed, and the aircraft will initially make a rapid excursion above the desired glidepath at point B in Figure 8-6. The natural reaction of the pilot in this situation is to reduce power and steepen the approach. However, as the aircraft flies closer to the thunderstorm (position C), the outflow which formed the gust front is likely to become a downdraught. The situation is now one of energy loss and is made worse by the aircrafts reduced power situation. Height loss is inevitable unless substantial power is applied and a go-around initiated.
Chapter 8 Page 14
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear FIGURE 8-6 Landing in Downdraught Conditions - Effect of Windshear on the Approach Path
Actions Required to Counter the Effect of Windshear Energy Loss Situation 24. The energy loss situation in the circumstances described (loss of headwind component, increase in tailwind component or strong downdraught windshear) result in sudden loss of airspeed. Rapid action is required by the pilot to limit height loss and a further deterioration of the situation. The immediate actions of the pilot which are considered to be vital are: (a)
Chapter 8 Page 15
increase power (to full go-around power if required) briskly;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear (b)
raise the nose of the aircraft to check descent;
(c)
coordinate power and pitch;
(d)
be prepared to carry out a missed approach.
25. The effects of an encounter with a microburst when making an approach are such that even more stringent action is required. If anticipation and avoidance have not succeeded, the pilot is faced with a very hazardous phenomenon. The actions recommended are:
Chapter 8 Page 16
(a)
accept an initial energy gain from the outflow (gust-front) of the microburst;
(b)
anticipate the next stage (severe energy loss) by increasing to go-around power (be prepared to go to maximum power if necessary);
(c)
select a pitch angle consistent with a missed approach (typically about 15°) and hold it against turbulence and buffeting;
(d)
as the encounter with the downdraught proceeds, the true angle of attack may change. If the stick-shaker (if fitted) activates, adjust the pitch angle to just below stick shaker activation;
(e)
if further energy loss occurs where the downdraught is changing into a tailwind and a risk of striking the ground increases, even with maximum power, it may be necessary to increase the pitch angle further and hold a value which just produces stick-shaker activation.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear Energy Gain Situation 26. An energy gain situation might occur on departure when climbing into a sudden increase in headwind. Once again, if the risk of windshear, particularly from a microburst, is anticipated and can be avoided, perhaps by delaying the departure, this is the preferred course of action. However, if a microburst is encountered, it is likely that the initial energy gain will be followed by an energy loss. 27. The recommended course of action, in general, is to ignore noise abatement procedures, maintain high pitch angles but be prepared to ease the pitch angle if the stick-shaker activates. The recommended initial actions are: (a)
select maximum power as soon as possible;
(b)
adopt a pitch angle of around 15° and try to hold that attitude; do not chase airspeed;
(c)
be guided by stick-shaker indications when holding or increasing pitch attitude, attempt to hold a pitch angle of just below stick-shaker activation.
Automatic Flight Control Systems 28. Autopilots and autothrottles, in the main, should cope with holding attitude in moderate windshear encounters but need to be monitored. The use of speed, height or rate of climb/descent locks is not recommended. 29. Autothrottles are unable to anticipate requirements in a changing situation, such that a rapid rise in airspeed may lead to an undesirable low throttle setting leading to a slow power recovery when it is needed most. In such circumstances it may be safer to revert to manual throttle control combined with an increased level of crew cooperation and instrument monitoring.
Chapter 8 Page 17
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Windshear 30. off.
Flight directors, unless designed to provide guidance during windshear should be switched
General Guidance 31. It should be apparent by now that low altitude windshear is a very serious hazard and wherever possible must be avoided. Pilots must be able therefore to:
Chapter 8 Page 18
•
Recognise the situations where it occurs and the signs of its presence.
•
Avoid it by diverting or delaying the flight.
•
Anticipate the actions required at the onset of an encounter.
•
Apply the techniques recommended for the aircraft without hesitation.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Wake Turbulence Wake Vortex Characteristics
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence
9
Wake Turbulence
Wake Vortex Characteristics 1. Wake vortices, are present behind every aircraft, including helicopters when in forward flight, but are particularly severe when generated by heavy aircraft. They are most hazardous to aircraft with a small wing span during take-off, initial climb, final approach and landing phases of flight. 2. The characteristics of the wake vortex system generated by an aircraft in flight are determined by the aircraft’s mass, wingspan, airspeed, configuration and attitude. Subsequently these characteristics are altered by interactions between vortices and the ambient atmosphere and eventually, after a time varying according to the circumstances from a few seconds to a few minutes after the passage of an aircraft, the effects of the vortex become undetectable. 3. For practical purposes, the vortex system in the wake of an aircraft may be regarded as being made up of two counter-rotating cylindrical air masses trailing aft from the aircraft (Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2). The vortices from an aeroplane are created by air transferring from the undersurface (high pressure) side of the wing to the overwing (low pressure) side, usually at the wingtips. The direction of the airflow within each vortex is based on this principle and when viewed in relation to the aeroplane’s direction of travel is clockwise from the port wingtip and anticlockwise from the starboard wingtip.
Chapter 9 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence 4. Typically the two vortices are separated by about three quarters of the aircraft’s wingspan and in still air they tend to drift slowly downwards and either level off, usually not more than 1000 ft below the flight path of the aircraft, or, on approaching the ground, move sideways from the track of the generating aircraft at a height approximately equal to half the aircraft’s wingspan (see Figure 9-3).
FIGURE 9-1 General View of Aircraft Trailing Vortex System
Chapter 9 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence FIGURE 9-2 Helicopter Vortices
FIGURE 9-3 Vortex Near the Ground in Still Air, Viewed from behind the Generating Aircraft
5. The maximum tangential airspeed in the vortex system, which may be as much as 300 ft/sec immediately behind a large aircraft, decays slowly with time after the passage of the aircraft and eventually drop sharply as the vortex system disintegrates.
Chapter 9 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence 6. Wake vortex generation begins when the nosewheel lifts off the runway on take-off and continues until the nosewheel touches down on landing.
FIGURE 9-4 Vortex Generation on Take-Off and Landing 7. Vortex strength increases with the weight of the generating aircraft. With the aircraft in a given configuration, the vortex strength increases with decreasing aircraft speed; and for a given mass and speed the vortex strength is greatest when the aircraft is in a clean configuration (hence, heavy, clean and slow is the worst combination). There is some evidence that for given mass and speed a helicopter produces a stronger vortex than a fixed-wing aircraft. 8. In a stable airflow, the wake vortex system will drift with the wind. Figure 9-5 shows the possible effect of a crosswind on the motion of a vortex pair close to the ground.
Chapter 9 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence FIGURE 9-5 Vortex Movement Near the Ground in a Light Crosswind, Viewed from Behind the Generating Aircraft 9. Wind shear causes the two vortices to descend at different rates and close to the ground, can cause one of the vortices to rise. In still air, the interaction of the vortices with the surface will tend to cause them to move outwards at about 5kt. On the other hand, turbulence and high winds close to the ground hasten the decay and disintegration of vortices. Special attention must be given to situations of light crosswind (5kt), when vortices may stay in the approach and touchdown areas of airports or sink to the landing or take-off paths of succeeding aircraft as illustrated in Figure 9-5. 10. In flight, the area up to 1000 ft below and behind a large aircraft should avoided, especially at low altitude where even a momentary wake vortex encounter could be hazardous for a smaller aircraft. When an aircraft is at cruise speed a vortex may persist at considerable distances behind. However, the highest proportion of reported wake turbulence incidents occur in the approach and to a lesser extent, the departure phases of flight.
Chapter 9 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence
Classification of Aircraft (ICAO) 11. The separation minima recommended by ICAO (in (PANS-RAC Doc.4444) are based on the aircraft wake turbulence categories according to the maximum certificated take-off mass as follows: (a)
Heavy (H) – all aircraft types of 136,000kg or more;
(b)
Medium (M) – aircraft types of less than 136,000kg but more than 7,000kg; and,
(c)
Light (L) – aircraft types of 7,000kg or less.
Note 1. There is some evidence that helicopters, when in flight, produce vortices which, per kg of aircraft mass, are more intense than those of aeroplanes. Note 2. The letters shown in brackets are entered on the air traffic flight plan in item 9 to indicate the aircraft’s wake turbulence category.
Wake Turbulence Separation Minima 12.
The following minima apply when radar-separation is not being used.
Arriving aircraft 13.
Chapter 9 Page 6
When timed approaches are being used: (a)
Light arriving after a Medium or Heavy – separation 3 minutes;
(b)
Medium arriving after a Heavy – separation 2 minutes.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence Departing Aircraft 14.
Separation for departing aircraft, when taking off from:
•
the same runway; or,
•
from parallel runways less than 760m apart; or,
•
crossing runways or, parallel runways less than 760m apart, if the projected flight path of the second aircraft will cross that of the first at the same level or less than 1000ft below: (a)
Light or Medium departing after a Heavy – 2 minutes;
(b)
Light departing after a Medium – 2 minutes.
Note. These times are increased to 3 minutes when the second aircraft is taking off from an intermediate point on the same runway or a parallel runway separated by less than 760m
Displaced Landing Threshold 15.
Chapter 9 Page 7
When operating on a runway with a displaced landing threshold the separation timing is: (a)
Light or Medium departing after a Heavy arrival – 2 minutes;
(b)
Light departing after a Medium arrival – 2 minutes; or,
(c)
Light or Medium arrival follows a Heavy departure – 2 minutes;
(d)
Light arrival follows a Medium departure – 2 minutes.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Wake Turbulence Opposite Direction 16.
When aircraft are using opposite direction runways the required separation is: (a)
Light or Medium taking off or landing after a Heavy has carried out a low missed approach in the opposite direction – 2 minutes; or,
(b)
Light taking off or landing after a Medium has carried out a low missed approach in the opposite direction – 2 minutes.
Note. The same separation applies if the second aircraft is landing on a parallel opposite direction runway separated by less than 760m.
Wake Turbulence Radar Separation Minima
Chapter 9 Page 8
17. for:
When radar separation is in operation the following wake turbulence separation is applicable
•
one aircraft operating directly behind another at the same altitude or within 1000ft below; or,
•
both aircraft using the same runway or parallel runways separated by less than 760m; or,
•
one aircraft is crossing behind another at the same level or less than 1000ft below: (a)
Light after Heavy – 6nm (11.1km);
(b)
Medium after Heavy – 5nm (9.3km);
(c)
Heavy after Heavy – 4nm (7.4km);
(d)
Light after Medium – 5nm (9.3km).
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Security JAR-OPS Requirements - Unlawful Interference ICAO (Annex 17) Requirements Preventative Security Measures
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Security
10
Security
JAR-OPS Requirements - Unlawful Interference Operator Responsibilities 1. The operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that all appropriate personnel are familiar with and comply with, the relevant requirements of the national security programmes of the State of the operator.
Training Programmes 2. The operator is required to establish, maintain and conduct approved training programmes which enable personnel to take appropriate action to prevent acts of unlawful interference such as sabotage or unlawful seizure of aeroplanes and to minimise the consequences of such events, should they occur.
Search Procedures 3. The operator is required to ensure that all aeroplanes carry a checklist of the procedures to be followed for that aeroplane type, when searching for concealed weapons, explosives or other dangerous devices.
Chapter 10 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Security
Commander’s Responsibilities – Unlawful Interference 4. Following an act of unlawful interference on board an aeroplane the commander or, in his absence, the operator is required by JAR-OPS to submit, without delay, a report of such an act, to the designated local authority and the Authority in the State of the Operator.
Flight Crew Compartment Security 5. The flight crew compartment door, if installed, on aeroplanes operated for the transport of passengers is required by JAR-OPS to be capable of being locked from within the compartment, in order to prevent unauthorised access.
ICAO (Annex 17) Requirements Responsibilities of the Contracting State in which Unlawful Interference Occurs 6. Each contracting State is required to take adequate measures for the safety of passengers and crew of an aircraft that is being subjected to an act of unlawful interference until their journey can be continued. 7. Each Contracting State responsible for providing air traffic services for an aircraft which is the subject of an act of unlawful interference is required to collect all relevant information on the flight and communicate it to all other States responsible for ATS units concerned, including those at the known or presumed destination airport, so that timely contingency action can be taken.
Chapter 10 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Security 8. Each Contracting State is required to provide such assistance to an aircraft which is subjected to unlawful seizure, including the provision of navigation aids, air traffic services and permission to land as may be necessitated by the circumstances. 9. A Contracting State in whose territory an aircraft which has been subjected to unlawful seizure lands is required, as far as is practicable, to ensure that it is detained on the ground unless its departure is necessitated by the overriding duty to protect human life. It must be recognised that consultation between the State where the aircraft has landed and the State of the Operator of the aircraft is an important consideration.
In Flight Procedures - Commander’s Responsibilities Notifying ATS Units 10. The commander of an aircraft which is being subjected to unlawful interference is required to try to notify the appropriate ATS unit of this fact, and of any significant circumstances associated with it and whether any deviation from the current flight plan is required. (This action is required so that ATS units can give priority to the aircraft and minimise conflict with other traffic).
Operation of SSR Transponder 11. Should an aircraft in flight be subjected to unlawful interference, the pilot-in-command is required, if able, to set the SSR transponder to Mode A 7500 (plus Mode C) to indicate this fact, unless circumstances warrant the use of the emergency code 7700. 12. If, after selecting Mode A 7500, ATC ask for confirmation of the code, the pilot is required, if able, to confirm it or to not reply at all. In the absence of a reply ATC will assume the code setting was intended.
Chapter 10 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Security Deviation from Assigned Track or Route 13. When an aircraft is subjected to unlawful interference unless considerations on board dictate otherwise, the pilot-in-command should attempt to continue flying on the assigned track and at the assigned cruising level at least until able to notify an ATS unit or until within radar cover. 14. If circumstances dictate that the aircraft must depart from its assigned track or its assigned cruising level without being able to make radio contact with ATS, the pilot should whenever possible: (a)
attempt to broadcast warnings on the VHF emergency frequency and other appropriate frequencies, unless considerations on board dictate otherwise. Other equipment such as on-board transponders, data links etc. should be used when circumstances permit; and
(b)
proceed in accordance with any special procedures for in-flight contingencies, where such procedures have been established and promulgated in Doc.7030 (Regional Supplementary Procedures); or,
(c)
if no applicable regional procedures have been established, proceed at a level which differs from the cruising levels normally used for IFR flight in the area by 300m (1000ft) if above FL290 or, by 150m (500ft) if below FL290.
Preventative Security Measures 15. Each Contracting State is required to establish measures to prevent weapons, explosives or any other dangerous device which may be used for unlawful interference from being introduced by any reasons on board an aircraft involved in international navigation.
Chapter 10 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Security
Carriage of Weapons 16. Law enforcement officers and other authorised persons may be permitted to carry weapons on board an aircraft, whilst acting in the performance of their duties. ICAO Annex 17 recommends that Contracting States should ensure that the carriage of such weapons should be subject to special authorisation in accordance with the laws of the States involved. 17. Annex 17 also recommends that Contracting States should ensure that the carriage of weapons by other persons is allowed only when a duly qualified person has determined that such weapons are not loaded, and that they are stored in a place inacessable to any person during flight time. 18. Contracting States should ensure that the pilot-in-command is notified as to the number of armed persons and their seat location.
Sabotage 19. ICAO Annex 6 requires that an operator must establish a checklist of procedures to be followed in searching an aircraft for a bomb in a case of suspected sabotage 20. The checklist must be supported by guidance on the course of action to be followed should a bomb or suspicious object be found, as well as information on the least risk bomb location specific to the aeroplane.
Chapter 10 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Emergency and Precautionary Landings
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Emergency and Precautionary Landings
Emergency and Precautionary Landings
11
Definitions 1. A precautionary landing is one that is planned in flight to overcome an unforeseen occurrence which does not immediately endanger the safety of the aircraft. For example, the sudden serious illness of a passenger or an unexpected shortage of fuel. Some such events, if not addressed at an early stage could, with the passage of time, become worse and eventually endanger the occupants and/or the aeroplane. The landing is therefore made as at an aerodrome which is suitable for the aeroplane as a precaution to prevent the situation worsening. 2. An emergency landing is one that is made as soon as possible to overcome an in-flightoccurrence that endangers the safety of the aeroplane. The landing, when possible, should be made at the nearest aerodrome. However, if it is a dire emergency the landing should be made as soon as possible either on land or water. 3. Although such an emergency landing will enable the crew to prepare for the landing, sometimes this is not possible because it occurs immediately after take-off or prior to landing. 4. Examples of the first type of emergency are a double engine failure or structural failure and those same incidents happening on take-off or landing would result in an immediate emergency landing.
Chapter 11 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Emergency and Precautionary Landings 5. An emergency landing other than at an aerodrome used to be referred to as a ‘forced’ landing, in other words, there is no choice, the circumstances compel an immediate landing. These can be divided into unplanned and pre-planned landings. A landing whether planned or unplanned on to water is known as a ditching.
Unplanned Emergency Landings 6. This type of landing is the most critical case because it is planned without warning and there is not sufficient time to execute a procedure. The successful outcome of such an event depends on the competence and initiative of the crew. The captain will initiate the required action including the evacuation of the aircraft. The only warning given will be by the pilot-in-command on the aircraft public address (PA) system. The announcement will be ‘This is the Captain, this is an emergency, Brace, Brace’. After the aircraft has come to rest:
Chapter 11 Page 2
(a)
On land the flight crew will give as much guidance as possible in the time available for the evacuation of the aeroplane. If the condition of the aeroplane is clearly catastrophic then the cabin crew must initiate the evacuation.
(b)
On water the situation must always be treated as catastrophic and the cabin crew must tell the passengers to put on life jackets and instruct them to inflate them only on exit from the aircraft. The cabin crew are responsible for the immediate evacuation of the aeroplane without instructions from the Flight Crew.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Emergency and Precautionary Landings
Pre-Planned Emergency Landings 7. For this type of emergency landing there will be some time to plan a course of action and prepare for the landing. The time available may be relatively short and may preclude the execution of all the actions listed in the following procedures. (a)
(b)
Chapter 11 Page 3
Actions before approach to land: (i)
Carry out the emergency drills;
(ii)
Transmit a Mayday message;
(iii)
Ask the senior flight attendant to come to the flight deck;
(iv)
Brief the flight attendant on the nature of the emergency and the time available to landing;
(v)
Brief the passengers on the PA and warn them on passing through each 10,000 feet during the descent;
(vi)
At 1000 feet the co-pilot calls ‘cabin crew take your seats for landing’.
Factors to be considered when selecting the area for an emergency landing are:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Emergency and Precautionary Landings
(c)
Chapter 11 Page 4
(i)
The area of ground should be relatively flat, free of trees and obstructions and in a non-mountainous area. If possible the area should be close to habitation and/or surface transport links. All of these requirements may not be possible particularly over desert and arctic area. It is therefore important to continue transmitting the aircraft’s position to the controlling authority as long as possible;
(ii)
If possible, land into wind to reduce the groundspeed on impact. The surface wind may be determined from any smoke, drifting sand or blowing snow. If this is not possible, use the INS or doppler wind at low altitude as a guide;
(iii)
Avoid landing into sun if it is at a low angle of elevation because the glare will restrict the visibility on approach to land. At night attempt to land towards the moon because it will illuminate the ground.
Actions on approach to land: (i)
At 1000 feet the co-pilot calls ‘Cabin Crew take your seats for landing’. Then at 200 feet, ‘Brace, Brace’ is called on the PA by the co-pilot;
(ii)
The co-pilot should call speed and height continuously to the captain on finals;
(iii)
The decision whether to lower the undercarriage or not will depend on the circumstances. It is the captains decision;
(iv)
Just prior to impact both pilot and co-pilot should brace themselves after turning off the HP and LP cocks.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Emergency and Precautionary Landings (d)
Evacuation of the aircraft: (i)
After landing the Captain, or in his absence the next most senior crew member, will order an evacuation by PA calling ‘This is an emergency, Evacuate, Evacuate’ followed by the evacuation alarm;
(ii)
If hazardous conditions are known to exist near a particular exit additional information may be passed over the PA;
(iii)
If the landing has clearly been catastrophic the cabin crew should commence evacuation without waiting for an order.
Ditching 8.
The main differences between a pre-planned emergency landing and ditching are: (a)
Chapter 11 Page 5
Factors to be considered when selecting an area to ditch the aircraft: (i)
Proximity of land. If possible land as close as possible to land;
(ii)
Proximity of shipping. Land as close to shipping as possible and make radio contact on an emergency frequency. This will facilitate rapid rescue;
(iii)
Estimate the swell and land along the line of the swell;
(iv)
Determine the wind direction from the spray and white caps. Approach into wind to reduce the groundspeed before touch-down;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Emergency and Precautionary Landings (v) (b)
(c)
Chapter 11 Page 6
Inform passengers of the location of their life jackets and advise them to put them on well before landing and not to inflate them before exiting the aircraft.
Evacuation of the aircraft: (i)
All ditchings must be treated as catastrophic;
(ii)
Due account must be made for the aircraft altitude in the water when advising the cabin crew which exits to utilise;
Actions after landing: (i)
Ensure all survivors are well clear of the aircraft (in dinghies after a ditching);
(ii)
Crew to leave the aircraft last with any survival equipment;
(iii)
Determine what injuries have been sustained if any and nominate crew members to treat them;
(iv)
Assemble ground location aids for immediate use. communication by radio of possible;
(v)
Check emergency equipment including rations. Institute immediate rationing;
(vi)
Captain to delegate duties;
(vii)
Captain to decide a plan of action with the rest of the crew.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Establish two-way
071 Operational Procedures
Fuel Jettison Requirements Safety Procedures
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Fuel Jettison
12
Fuel Jettison
Requirements 1. JAR 25 specifies that a fuel jettisoning system must be installed on each aeroplane unless it has been shown that the aeroplane meets certain rate-of-climb requirements at a specified mass. (The specified mass is based upon the maximum take-off mass less the actual or computed mass of fuel necessary for a 15 minute flight comprising a take-off, go around and landing at the aerodrome of departure with the aeroplane in the appropriate configuration). 2. If a jettison system is installed it must be capable of jettisoning enough fuel within 15 minutes to reduce the aeroplane mass from the value indicated in paragraph 1 to a mass at which the specified rate of climb can be achieved. 3. A jettison system must be designed so as to prevent the jettisoning of fuel in the tanks used for take-off and landing below a specified level. (This level is that which provides for a climb from sea level to 10,000 ft and thereafter 45 minutes at a cruise speed for maximum range). This specified fuel may, however, be jettisoned using a separate auxiliary system if one is fitted. 4. Unless it has been shown that using flaps, slots and slats does not adversely affect fuel jettisoning, there must be a placard adjacent to the jettison control warning to crew members not to jettison fuel while such systems are in use.
Chapter 12 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Fuel Jettison
Safety Procedures 5. States may specify minimum altitudes over land below which, jettisoning of fuel is not permitted except in emergency. Furthermore, Annex 2 (Rules of the Air) requires that nothing be dropped or sprayed from an aircraft in flight except under conditions prescribed by the appropriate authority and as indicated by relevant information, advice and/or clearance from the appropriate air traffic services unit. 6. Fuel jettison procedures are normally included in the aeroplane operations manual under abnormal and emergency procedures. A typical checklist is likely to contain appropriate safety checks, to be made before starting to jettison fuel. Such checks would include: (a)
advise ATC before jettisoning fuel;
(b)
minimum attitude eg, not below 6000 ft except in emergency;
(c)
avoid areas of precipitation (which can cause a build up of static), static or lightning discharge;
(d)
no transmissions on HF during jettisoning;
(e)
no smoking unless aircraft pressurised.
The checklist may, if appropriate, also advise against using flaps, slots or slats during jettisoning or of following a flight path in which the aeroplane could pass through the area of jettisoned fuel vapour. 7. The jettisoning procedure must be monitored closely to ensure that flow is even and fuel balance is maintained. Fuel quantity indicators should be checked continuously to monitor jettison pump operation.
Chapter 12 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Transport of Dangerous Goods Applicability of Regulations Shipper’s Responsibilities Operator’s Responsibilities
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods
13
Transport of Dangerous Goods
Definitions 1.
The following terms may be used in connection with the transport of dangerous goods:
Acceptance checklist. A document used to assist in carrying out a check on the external appearance of packages of dangerous goods and their associated documents to determine that all appropriate requirements are met.
Cargo aircraft.
Any aircraft, other than a passenger aircraft, which is carrying goods or
property.
Consignment.
One or more packages of dangerous goods accepted by an operator from one shipper at one time and at one address, receipted for in one lot and moving to one consignee at one destination address.
Dangerous Goods.
Articles or substances which are capable of posing significant risk to health, safety or property when transported by air.
Dangerous Goods accident.
An occurrence associated with and related to the transport of dangerous goods by air which results in fatal or serious injury to a person or major property damage.
Chapter 13 Page 1
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods Dangerous Goods incident. An occurrence, other than a dangerous goods accident, associated with and related to the transport of dangerous goods by air, not necessarily occurring on board an aircraft, which results in injury to a person, property damage, fire, breakage, spillage, leakage of fluid or radiation or other evidence that the integrity of the packaging has not been maintained. Any occurrence relating to the transport of dangerous goods which seriously jeopardises the aircraft or its occupants is also deemed to constitute a dangerous goods incident. Dangerous goods transport document. A document which is specified by the Technical Instructions. It is completed by the person who offers the dangerous goods for air transport (the shipper) and contains information about those goods. The document bears a signed declaration indicating that the dangerous goods are fully and accurately described and all appropriate procedures have been followed.
Exception.
A provision in Annex 18 which excluded a specific item of dangerous goods from the requirements normally applicable to that item.
Exemption.
An authorisation issued by an appropriate national authority providing relief from the provisions of Annex 18.
Flammable.
Note – the word flammable has the same meaning as inflammable in the English
language.
Flight crew member.
A licensed crew member charged with duties essential to the operation of an aircraft during flight time.
Incompatible.
Describing dangerous goods which, if mixed, would be liable to cause a dangerous evolution of heat or gas or produce a corrosive substance.
Chapter 13 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods Overpack.
An enclosure used by a single shipper to contain one or more packages and to form one handling unit for convenience of handling and stowage.
Package.
The complete product of the packing operation consisting of the packaging and its contents prepared for transport.
Packaging.
Receptacles and any other components or materials necessary for the receptacle to perform its containment function and to ensure compliance with the packing requirements of the Annex.
Packing.
The art and operation by which articles or substances are enveloped in wrappings and/ or enclosed in packaging or otherwise secured.
Passenger aircraft.
An aircraft that carries any person other than a crew member, an operator’s employee in an official capacity, an authorised representative of an appropriate national authority or a person accompanying a consignment or other cargo.
Proper shipping name.
The name to be used to describe a particular article or substance in all shipping documents and notifications and, where appropriate, on packaging.
Serious injury.
Chapter 13 Page 3
An injury which is sustained by a person in an accident and which:
(a)
Requires hospitalisation for more than 48 hours, commencing within seven days from the date the injury was received; or
(b)
Results in a fracture of any bone (except simple fractures of fingers, toes or nose); or
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods (c)
Involves lacerations which cause severe haemorrhage, nerve, muscle or tendon damage; or
(d)
Involves injury to any internal organ; or
(e)
Involves second or third degree burns, or any burns affecting more than 5% of the body surface; or
(f)
Involves verified exposure to infectious substances or injurious radiation.
State of Origin.
The State in the territory of which the cargo was first loaded on an aircraft.
State of the Operator.
The State in which the operator has his principal place of business or, it he has no such place of business, his permanent residence. Technical Instructions. The latest effective edition of the Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air (Doc. 9284) approved by the Council of ICAO.
UN number.
The four-digit number assigned by the United Nations Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods to identify a substance or a particular group of substances.
Unit local device.
Any type of freight container, aircraft container, aircraft pallet with a net, or aircraft pallet with a net over an igloo.
Chapter 13 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods
Applicability of Regulations General 2. The Standards and Recommended Practices of Annex 18 are applicable to all international operations of civil aircraft. In cases of extreme urgency or when other forms of transport are inappropriate or full compliance with the prescribed requirements is contrary to the public interest, the States concerned may grant exemptions from these provisions provided that in such cases every effort shall be made to achieve an over-all level of safety in transport which is equivalent to the level of safety provided by these provisions.
Dangerous Goods Technical Instructions 3. The regulations concerning the transport of dangerous goods on international flights is contained in the Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air (Doc 9284), approved, issued and amended in accordance with the procedure established by the ICAO Council. Each Contracting State is required to take the necessary measures to achieve compliance with the provisions contained in this document.
Domestic Civil Aircraft Operations 4. In the interests of safety and of minimising interruptions to the international transport of dangerous goods. Contracting States should also take the necessary measures to achieve compliance with Annex 18 and the Technical Instructions for domestic civil aircraft operations.
Chapter 13 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods Carriage Authorisation 5. An operator shall not, according to JAR-OPS, transport dangerous goods unless approved to do so by the Authority.
Exceptions to the Requirements 6. Articles and substances which would otherwise be classed as dangerous goods but which are required to be on board the aircraft in accordance with the pertinent airworthiness requirement and operating regulations, or for those specialised purposes identified in the Technical Instructions, are exempted except from the provisions of Annex 18. 7. Where articles and substances intended as replacements for those described in paragraph 6 are carried on an aircraft, they are to transported in accordance with the provisions of Annex 18 except as permitted in the Technical Instructions. 8. Articles and substances intended for the personal use of passengers and crew members shall be exempted from the provisions of this Annex to the extent specified in the Technical Instructions.
Notification of Variations from the Technical Instructions 9. Where a Contracting State adopts different provisions from those specified in the Technical Instructions, it shall notify ICAO promptly of such State variations for publication in the Technical Instructions.
Classification 10. The classification of an article or substance shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Instructions.
Chapter 13 Page 6
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods
Limitation on the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air Dangerous Goods Permitted for Transport by Air 11. The transport of dangerous goods by air shall be forbidden except as established in Annex 18 and the detailed specifications and procedures provided in the Technical Instructions.
Chapter 13 Page 7
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods Dangerous Goods Forbidden for Transport by Air Unless Exempted 12. The dangerous goods described hereunder are forbidden on aircraft unless exempted by the States concerned under the provisions of paragraph 9 or, unless the provisions of the Technical Instructions indicate they may be transported under an approval issued by the State of Origin: (a)
articles and substances that are identified in the Technical Instructions as being forbidden for transport in normal circumstances; and
(b)
infected live animals.
Dangerous Goods Forbidden for Transport by Air Under Any Circumstances 13. Articles and substances that are specifically identified by name or by generic description in the Technical Instructions as being forbidden for transport by air under any circumstances shall not be carried on any aircraft.
Packaging of Dangerous Goods General Requirements 14. Dangerous goods must be packaged in accordance with the provisions of Annex 18 and as provided for in the Technical Instructions.
Chapter 13 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods Packagings 15. Packagings used for the transport of dangerous goods by air must be of good quality and constructed and securely closed so as to prevent leakage which might be caused in normal conditions of transport, by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure, or by vibration. 16. Packagings must be suitable for the contents. Packagings in direct contact with dangerous goods shall be resistant to any chemical or other action of such goods. 17. Packagings must meet the material and construction specifications in the Technical Instructions. 18.
Packagings must be tested in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Instructions.
Labelling and Marking Labels 19. Unless otherwise provided for in the Technical Instructions, each package of dangerous goods shall be labelled with the appropriate labels and in accordance with the provisions set forth in the Instructions.
Markings 20. Unless otherwise provided for in the Technical Instructions, each package of dangerous goods shall be marked with the proper shipping name of its contents and, when assigned, the UN number and such other markings as may be specified in those Instruction.
Chapter 13 Page 9
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods Languages to be used for Markings 21. In addition to the languages required by the State of Origin and pending the development the adoption of a more suitable form of expression for universal use, English should be used for the markings related to dangerous goods.
Shipper’s Responsibilities Dangerous Goods Transport Document 22. Before a shipper offers any package or overpack of dangerous goods for transport by air, that person shall ensure that the dangerous goods are not forbidden for transport by air and are properly classified, packed, marked, labelled and accompanied by a properly executed dangerous goods transport document, as specified in Annex 18 and the Technical Instructions.
Languages to be used 23. In addition to the languages which may be required by the State of Origin and pending the development and adoption of a more suitable form of expression for universal use, English should be used for the dangerous goods transport document.
Operator’s Responsibilities Acceptance for Transport 24.
Chapter 13 Page 10
An operator shall not accept dangerous goods for transport by air:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods (a)
unless the dangerous goods are accompanied by a completed dangerous goods transport document, except where the Technical Instructions indicate that such a document is not required; and
(b)
until the package, overpack or freight container containing the dangerous goods has been inspected in accordance with the acceptance procedures contained in the Technical Instructions.
Acceptance Checklist 25. An operator shall develop and use an acceptance checklist as an aid to compliance with the provisions of the previous paragraph.
Inspection for Damage or Leakage 26. Packages and overpacks containing dangerous goods and freight containers containing radioactive material shall be inspected for evidence of leakage or damage before loading on an aircraft or into a unit load device. Leaking or damaged packages, overpacks or freight containers shall not be loaded on an aircraft. If evidence of damage or leakage is found after loading on an aircraft, the area where the dangerous goods or unit load device were stowed on the aircraft shall be inspected for damage or contamination. 27. Any hazardous contamination found on an aircraft as a result of leakage or damage to dangerous goods shall be removed without delay. 28. An aircraft which has been contaminated by radioactive materials shall immediately be taken out of service and not returned to service until the radiation level at any accessible surface and the non-fixed contamination are not more than the values specified in the Technical Instructions.
Chapter 13 Page 11
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods
Location on the Aircraft 29. Dangerous goods shall not be carried in an aircraft cabin occupied by passengers or on the flight deck of an aircraft, except in circumstances permitted by the provisions of the Technical Instructions. 30. Packages containing dangerous goods which might react dangerously one with another shall not be stowed on an aircraft next to each other or in a position that would allow interaction between them in the event of a leakage. 31. When dangerous goods subject to the provisions contained herein are loaded in an aircraft, the operator shall protect the dangerous goods from being damaged, and shall secure such goods in the aircraft in such a manner that will prevent any movement in flight which would change the orientation of the packages.
Information to be Provided to Pilot-in-Command 32. An operator is required to ensure that the commander is provided with written information as specified in Technical Instructions.
Information to be Provided to Crew Members 33. An operator must ensure that information is provided in the Operations Manual to enable crew members to carry out their responsibilities in regard to dangerous goods including actions to be taken in the event of emergencies arising which involve dangerous goods.
Chapter 13 Page 12
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods
Approval to Transport Dangerous Goods 34. Permanent approval for the transport of dangerous goods will be reflected on the Air Operator Certificate. In other circumstances an approval may be issued separately. 35. Before the issue of an approval for the transport of dangerous goods, the operator should satisfy the Authority that adequate training has been given, that all relevant documents (eg. for ground handling, aeroplane handling, training) contain information and instructions on dangerous goods, and that there are procedures in place to ensure the safe handling of dangerous goods at all stages of air transport.
Dangerous Goods Permitted to be Carried on an Aeroplane 36. Dangerous goods required to be on board an aeroplane in accordance with the relevant JARs or for operating reasons are those which are for: (a)
the airworthiness of the aeroplane;
(b)
the safe operation of the aeroplane; or
(c)
the health of passengers or crew;
(d)
catering or cabin supplies;
(e)
for use in flight as a veterinary aid or as a humane killer for an animal.
Such dangerous goods include but are not limited to: (a)
Chapter 13 Page 13
Batteries;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods (b)
Fire extinguishers;
(c)
First-aid kits;
(d)
Insecticides/Air fresheners;
(e)
Lifesaving appliances; and
(f)
Portable oxygen supplies.
37. Gas cylinders, drugs, medicines, other medical material (such as sterilising wipes) and wet cell or lithium batteries are dangerous goods which are normally provided for use in flight as medical aid for a patient. (Equipment containing wet cell batteries is kept, and when necessary secured, in an upright position to prevent spillage of the electrolyte). However, what is carried may depend on the needs of the patient. These dangerous goods are not those which are a part on the normal equipment of the aeroplane. Note. Proper provision must be made to stow and secure all the equipment during take-off and landing and at all other times when deemed necessary by the pilot-in-command in the interests of safety.
Dangerous Goods Carried by Passengers or Crew 38. The Technical Instructions exclude some dangerous goods from the requirements normally applicable to them when they are carried by passengers or crew members, subject to certain conditions. 39.
Chapter 13 Page 14
The dangerous goods which each passenger or crew member can carry are:
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods
Chapter 13 Page 15
(a)
Alcoholic beverages not exceeding 70% alcohol by volume, when packed in receptacles of less than 5 litres:
(b)
Non-radioactive medicinal to toilet articles (including aerosols, hair sprays, perfumes, medicines containing alcohol); and, in checked baggage only, aerosols which are nonflammable, non-toxic and without subsidiary risk, when for sporting or home use. The net quantity of each single article should not exceed 0.5 litre or 0.5 kg and the total net quantity of all articles should not exceed 2 litres or 2 kg;
(c)
Safety matches or a lighter for the person’s own use and when carried by the person. However, ‘Strike anywhere’ matches, lighter containing unabsorbed liquid fuel (other than liquified gas), lighter fuel and lighter refills are not permitted;
(d)
A hydrocarbon gas-powered hair curler, providing the safety cover is securely fitted over the heating element. Gas refills are not permitted.
(e)
Small carbon dioxide gas cylinders worn for the operation of mechanical limbs and spare cylinders of similar size if required to ensure an adequate supply for the duration of the journey;
(f)
Radioisotopic cardiac pacemakers or other devices (including those powered by lithium batteries) implanted in a person, or radio-pharmaceuticals contained within the body of a person as a result of medical treatment;
(g)
A small medical or clinical thermometer containing mercury, for the person’s own use, when in its protective case;
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods Information to Passengers - Operator’s Responsibility 40. Information to passengers must be promulgated in such manner that passengers are warned as to the types of dangerous goods that must not be carried on board an aeroplane. 41.
As a minimum, this information should consist of: (a)
Warning notices or placards sufficient in number and prominently displayed, at each of the places at an airport where tickets are issued and passengers checked in, in aeroplane boarding areas and at any other place where passengers are checked in; and
(b)
A warning with the passenger ticket. This may be printed on the ticket or on a ticket wallet or on a leaflet.
(c)
The information to passengers may include reference to those dangerous goods which may be carried.
Information to Other Persons 42. Information to persons offering cargo for transport by air should be promulgated in such a manner that those persons are warned as to the need to properly identify and declare dangerous goods. 43. As a minimum this information should consist of warning notices or placards sufficient in number and prominently displayed at any location where cargo is accepted. 44. Pictographs may be used as an alternative to providing written information or to supplement such information.
Chapter 13 Page 16
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods
Information in the Event of an Aeroplane Incident or Accident Information Provided to Aerodrome Authorities by the Pilot-inCommand 45. If an in flight emergency occurs, the pilot-in-command should inform the appropriate air traffic services unit, for the information of aerodrome authorities, of any dangerous goods on board, including quantity and location on the aircraft.
Information Provided by the Operator 46. The operator of an aircraft carrying dangerous goods which is involved in an aircraft accident, shall, as soon as possible, inform the State in which the accident occurred of the dangerous goods carried, together with appropriate specified information and the quantity and location on board the aircraft of the dangerous goods.
Training 47. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to establish and maintain staff training programmes, as required by the Technical Instructions, which must be approved by the Authority. 48. However, where flight crew or other crew members, such as loadmasters, are responsible for checking the dangerous goods to be loaded on an aeroplane, their training should also be to the depth specified in JAR-OPS.
Chapter 13 Page 17
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods 49. Training in Emergency Procedures. The training in emergency procedures should include as a minimum: (a)
(b)
For flight crew members: (i)
Actions in the event of emergencies in flight occurring in the passenger cabin or in the cargo compartment; and
(ii)
The notification to Air Traffic Services should an in-flight emergency occur .
For crew members other than flight crew members: (i)
Dealing with incidents arising from dangerous goods carried by passengers; or
(ii)
Dealing with damaged or leaking packages in flight.
Dangerous Goods Incident and Accident Reports 50. Contracting States are required by ICAO to establish procedures for investigating and recording accidents and incidents which occur in its territory, which involve dangerous goods originating in or destined for, another State. Such reports are to be made in accordance with the Technical Instructions. 51. Any type of dangerous goods incident or accident should be reported, irrespective of whether the dangerous goods are contained in cargo, mail, passengers’ baggage or crew baggage. 52. Initial reports may be made by any means, but in all cases a written report should be made as soon as possible.
Chapter 13 Page 18
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Transport of Dangerous Goods 53. The report should be as precise as possible and contain all data known at the time the report is made, for example:
Chapter 13 Page 19
(a)
Date of the incident or accident;
(b)
Location of the incident or accident, the flight number and flight date, if applicable;
(c)
Description of the goods and the reference number of the air waybill, pouch, baggage tag, ticket, etc;
(d)
Other information as specified.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
071 Operational Procedures
Contaminated Runways Factors Affecting Braking Definitions Operational Aspects Braking Action Assessment Methods Hydroplaning (Aquaplaning)
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways
14
Contaminated Runways
Factors Affecting Braking 1. A number of factors directly affect the braking capability of an aeroplane during the landing and in the event of an abandoned take-off.
Chapter 14 Page 1
(a)
Runway surfaces. The nature and conditions of the runway surface determines in part, the amount of grip or friction achieved by a tyre. Smooth surfaces result in less friction and when even shallow depths of contamination are present, can result in significantly reduced braking capability. Increased depths of water, snow, slush or ice degrade braking capability on any runway surface.
(b)
Tyre condition. The tread and condition of the tyre must be designed not only to keep the maximum possible area in contact with the runway surface but also to permit the dispersal of water and therefore to delay the onset of aquaplaning. Aquaplaning is also likely to occur earlier than calculated when a tyre is under inflated.
(c)
External factors. Headwind assists braking; tailwind does not. Increase in altitude, and ambient temperature reduce braking capability.
(d)
Runway slope. A downsloping runway where aeroplane momentum is assisted by gravity results in reduced braking effectiveness.
(e)
Aircraft speed. Braking at higher speeds requires increased brake energy and increases the potential for overheating the braking system whilst reducing its effectiveness.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways 2. The operational aspects and considerations related to operating from contaminated runways are described in the following paragraph.
Definitions 3. A contaminated runway is defined in JAR-OPS as one on which more than 25% of the runway surface area (whether in isolated areas or not) within the required length and width being used is covered by any of the following: (a)
Surface water more than 3 mm (0.125 ins) deep, or by slush, or loose snow, equivalent to more than 3 mm (0.125 ins) of water;
(b)
Snow which has been compressed into a solid mass which resists further compression and will hold together or break into lumps if picked up (compacted snow) or;
(c)
Ice including wet ice.
Damp Runway 4. A damp runway is defined in JAR-OPS as one on which the surface is not dry, but when the moisture on it does not give it a shiny appearance. For performance purposes, a damp runway, other than grass runway, may be considered to be dry.
Dry Runway 5. A dry runway is defined in JAR-OPS as one which is neither wet nor contaminated, and includes those paved runways which have been specially prepared with grooves or porous pavement and maintained to retain “effectively dry” braking action when moisture is present.
Chapter 14 Page 2
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways
Wet Runway 6. A wet runway is defined in JAR-OPS as one on which the surface is covered with water, or equivalent, less than 3 mm (0.125 ins) deep or when there is sufficient moisture on the surface to cause it to appear reflective, but without significant areas of standing water.
Contaminants 7. Dry Snow. Loose hard snow is usually in the form of dry pellets which can be blown, or if compacted by hand, will fall apart again upon release. For this contaminant to be present the temperature must be below -5°C (and not risen since the snow fell). Its specific gravity is up to but not including 0.35. The maximum permissible depth for take-off or landing is 60 m on any part of the runway, measured by ruler. 8. Wet Snow. Loose snow taking the form of large flakes which if compacted by hand will stick together to form a snowball (if forms a white covering on all surfaces which when stamped upon does not slush up). The temperature for this type of snow is between -5°C and -1°C, with a specific gravity of 0.35 up to but not including 0.5. For take-off and landing the maximum permissible depth is 15 mm. A rough guide to this depth is the same as the welt of a shoe. 9. Compacted Snow. Snow which has been compressed into a solid mass and resists further compression is compacted snow. It will hold together or break into lumps if picked up. This type of covering is normally caused by the transit of vehicles over the surface when snow is falling. Its specific gravity is 0.5 and over. 10. Slush. A mixture of water and snow which is displaced with a splatter when a heel-and-toe slapping motion is made on the ground. The temperature is at or around 0ºC. A maximum depth of 15 mm is permissible for take-off and landing. Specific gravity is 0.5 up to 0.8.
Chapter 14 Page 3
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways 11. Water. Visible puddles, usually of rain, standing on the surface causing paved surfaces to glisten when the temperature is above 0ºC. On a natural surface it is assumed that more than 3 mm of water exists if under a firm foot pressure and water rises to the surface. 12. Mixtures. Mixtures of ice, snow and/or standing water may, especially when rain, sleet or snow is falling, produce a substance having an SG above 0.8. This substance is transparent at higher SG’s, and is easily distinguished from slush which is cloudy. 13. Ice. A frozen layer of surface moisture. The thickness of which varies and produces a poor coefficient of friction according to the condition of the surface.
Operational Aspects Effects of Contamination 14. The effect that contaminated surfaces have on the performance of an aircraft is different for each type because of weight, speed, tyre and undercarriage variations. If an aircraft is permitted to operate on contaminated surfaces, the Flight Manual will contain a statement to this effect giving any limitations and special handling techniques that may be necessary to ensure compliance with the appropriate regulations. 15. Most aerodrome authorities take action to minimise the effect of ice, snow and rain; but it is still necessary to measure the braking action on the surface. The most reliable and uniform method of providing this type of information is to measure that amount of friction on the surface. Not only the runways require testing, other surfaces such as holding bays, taxiways and aprons should be checked for satisfactory braking. A low friction value means that braking action is reduced and directional control on the surface degraded.
Chapter 14 Page 4
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways
Friction Measurements 16. Various methods may be used to measure surface friction, which is considered to be the maximum value of friction afforded when a wheel is braked but is still rolling. The most suitable method of assessment is generally determined by operational considerations. The method used to measure surface friction and then to report it is standardised to enable pilots to correctly interpret the meaning of the value stated. The equipment used for this purpose provides continuous measurement of the maximum friction along the entire runway and the value reported is called the braking coefficient of friction.
Braking Coefficient of Friction 17. Operationally, a pilot needs to know how the aeroplane will perform on a contaminated surface compared with how it would perform on a dry hard surface. Braking action information may be passed by R/T in descriptive terms or as a coefficient of friction which is defined as the tangential force applied by a surface, expressed as a proportion of the normal dry surface force upon a loaded, smooth-tyred aeroplane. The relationship between the braking coefficient of friction and the aircraft’s groundspeed for a reference wet hard surface is derived in accordance with the method described in JAR 25.
Contaminated Surface Measurements 18. Before the airport operating authority declares a surface fit for use by aircraft, the depth of contaminant and the braking action have to be measured. The depth of snow or slush on the runway is measured with a standard depth gauge every 300 metres along the runway between 5 and 10 metres either side of the centre-line and clear of any ruts. The average reading of depth for each third of the runway is then promulgated. The depth of ice covering runways is not measured.
Chapter 14 Page 5
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways 19. A continuous runway friction measuring trailer (Mu-meter) and a brake testing decelerometer (Tapley meter) carried in a light van or truck is used to measure the effect of ice, snow, slush and water on braking action. This method employs a runway friction measuring trailer (Mu-meter) towed by a vehicle at 40 mph. The equipment provides a continuous register of the mean coefficient of friction values either on a paper trace or by means of a digital read-out that is used in conjunction with a hand computer
Braking Action Assessment Methods 20. Improvement of Braking Action. To increase the friction value of aircraft manoeuvring areas affected by ice or snow, grit may have to be put on the surface if poor braking conditions persist. The specification of grit used is the best compromise between improving friction and causing least damage to aircraft. The risk to aircraft when using reverse thrust or pitch is high, and extreme caution is necessary particularly after a sudden thaw.
Reporting Braking Action to the Pilot 21. When the Mu-meter reading (friction reading) for any one third of the runway falls below 0.50 but not below 0.40, a single mean value for the whole runway will be passed by R/T to the pilot. This is preceded by the corresponding qualitative term and by a descriptive term of the conditions. Example: “Braking action medium 0.46. Heavy rain. Time of measurement 1030 “. 22. Should the value for any one-third fall below 0.40 then the values for each third will be given in order starting with the one nearest the threshold, preceded by the qualitative term appropriate to the whole runway and followed by a descriptive term of the conditions.
Chapter 14 Page 6
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways Example: “Braking action poor 0.46 0.37 0.39. Standing water. Time of measurement 1530”.
Interpretation of Braking Action Assessments 23. For take-off, as for landing, the aerodrome authorities measure the runway surface coefficient of friction and estimate the braking action. The reported braking action passed to the pilot is that of a vehicle unaffected by any condition other than that of the surface. It is therefore the pilot who must use his judgement of the other factors affecting the aircraft, such as crosswind and aeroplane mass, to place the appropriate interpretation on the reported conditions. A broad guide of braking action assessments (which should nevertheless be used with discretion) is as follows:
Chapter 14 Page 7
(a)
Good: Pilots can expect to take-off and/or land within the scheduled wet distances without undue directional control or braking difficulties caused by the runway conditions. Untreated ice does not come into this category but gritted ice could produce the friction required.
(b)
Medium: Aircraft are likely to use all of the wet scheduled distance, including the safety factor part of the distance. Directional control may be impaired. The achievement of satisfactory landing performance depends on the precise execution of the recommended flight technique.
(c)
Poor: The pilot must expect the aircraft to run at least the full “very wet” or aquaplaning distance, where this too is scheduled. There may be a significant deterioration in braking performance and in directional control. It is advisable to ensure that the landing distance specified in the flight Operations Manual for very wet conditions does not exceed the landing distance available.
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways SNOWTAM 24. In winter, aerodromes participating in the SNOWTAM system are requested to make reports of runway conditions following significant changes but in any event at least every 24 hr. 25. The SNOWTAM report identifies for the aerodrome, ‘inter alia’, the runways affects, the extent and type of contamination and the friction coefficient or assessed braking action as a code number (the braking action code). An illustration of this assessment code is as follows:
Chapter 14 Page 8
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways Measured or Calculated Coefficient
Estimated Braking Action
Braking Action Code
0.40 and above
Good
5
0.39 to 0.36
Medium/Good
4
0.35 to 0.30
Medium
3
0.29 to 0.26
Medium/Poor
2
0.25 and below
Poor
1
Readings Unreliable
-
9
Note. In METAR this information will be included as part of an 8 digit code group in the supplementary information. The last two digits representing either the friction reading (35 = 0.35 etc.) or the braking action code preceded by figure 9 (eg. 92 = braking action assessed as medium/ poor).
Reporting of Wet Runways 26. The presence of water on a runway will be reported to the pilot using the following description:
Chapter 14 Page 9
(a)
Damp – the surface shows a change of colour due to moisture;
(b)
Wet – the surface is soaked but no significant patches of standing water are visible;
(c)
Water Patches – Significant patches of standing water are visible (ie. more than 25% of the runway surface areas to be used covered by water >3mm deep, whether in isolated areas or not);
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways (d)
Flooded – extensive standing water is visible (ie. more than 50% of the assessed area covered by water >3 mm deep).
(Note (c) and (d) are considered to be contaminated and automatically imply a risk of aquaplaning).
Effects of Runway Contamination 27. Depths greater than 3 mm of water, slush or wet snow, or 10 mm of dry snow, are likely to have a significant effect on the performance of aeroplanes. The main effects are: (a)
additional drag – retardation effects on the wheels and spray impingement drag;
(b)
possibility of power loss or system malfunction due to spray ingestion or impingement;
(c)
reduced wheel-braking performance – the problems of aquaplaning;
(d)
directional control problems;
(e)
possibility of structural damage.
28. A water depth of less than 3 mm is normal during and after heavy rain and in such conditions, no corrections to take-off performance are necessary other than the allowance, where applicable, for the effect of a wet or slippery surface. However, on such a runway where the water depth is less than 3 mm and where the performance effect is insignificant, isolated patches of standing water or slush of depth in excess of 15 mm located in the latter part of the take-off run may still lead to ingestion and temporary power fluctuations which could impair safety.
Chapter 14 Page 10
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways 29. A continuous depth of water greater than 3 mm is unlikely as a result of rain alone, but can occur if torrential rain combines with lack of runway camber/crossfall or a crosswind to reduce the rate of water drainage from the runway. In such conditions the water depth is unlikely to persist for more than about 15 minutes after the rain has ceased and take-off should be delayed accordingly.
Limitations for Take-Off - Contaminated Runways 30. When operations from contaminated runways are unavoidable the following procedures are recommended: (a)
Take-offs should not be attempted in depths of dry snow greater than 60 mm or depths of water, slush or wet snow greater than 15 mm. If the snow is very dry, the depth limit may be increased to 80 mm;
(b)
Ensure that all retardation and anti-skid devices are fully serviceable and check that tyres are in good condition;
Limitations on Landing 31. Attempts to land on heavily contaminated runways involve considerable risk and should be avoided whenever possible. If the destination aerodrome is subject to such conditions, departure should be delayed until conditions improve or an alternate used. It follows that advice in the Aeroplane Flight Manual or Operations Manual concerning landing weights and techniques on very slippery or heavily contaminated runways is only there to enable the Commander to make a decision, when airborne, as to his best course of action.
Chapter 14 Page 11
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways 32. Depths of water or slush, exceeding approximately 3 mm, over a considerable proportion of the length of the runway, can have an adverse effect on landing performance. Under such conditions aquaplaning is likely to occur with its attendant problems of negligible wheel-braking and loss of directional control. Moreover, once aquaplaning is established it may, in certain circumstances, be maintained in much lower depths of water or slush. A landing should only be attempted in these conditions if there is an adequate distance margin over and above the normal Landing Distance Required and when the crosswind component is small. The effect of aquaplaning on the landing roll is comparable with that of landing on an icy surface and guidance is contained in some Flight Manuals on the effect on the basic landing distance of such very slippery conditions.
Contaminated Runway Calculations 33. Most modern aeroplanes are certificated using dry runway performance data. However, provision for operations on a contaminated or wet surface is provided for in JAR 25 AMJ 25X1591 and is required by JAR 25X1591. The method used by the manufactures to determine this data is similar to that used to determine dry runway data except V1 (Decision Speed) cannot be scheduled because of the indeterminate friction characteristics of the surface. Hence any information or data provided in the flight manual is of an advisory nature only.
JAR-OPS Requirements - Landing Wet Runway 34. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that when weather reports and/or forecasts indicate that the runway at the aerodrome of intended landing at the estimated time of arrival may be wet, the landing distance available is at least 115% of the required landing distance.
Chapter 14 Page 12
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways Contaminated Runway 35. An operator is required by JAR-OPS to ensure that when weather reports and/or forecasts indicate that the runway at the estimated time of arrival may be contaminated, the landing distance available must be at least the value of the required wet minimum landing distance or 115% of the landing distance required calculated for a contaminated runway.
Hydroplaning (Aquaplaning) 36. The tyre friction required by an aeroplane to maintain directional control and effective braking is a finite quantity for each aircraft type. The amount of friction actually obtained can be adversely affected by any surface contaminant. Water is particularly dangerous because it can cause an almost total loss of tyre friction. This condition which is known as hydroplaning occurs when water underneath a tyre builds up an increasing amount of resistance to being displaced (by the tyre) and eventually forms a layer between the runway and the tyre. The result is negligible braking and difficulty in maintaining directional control. 37. The effects of aquaplaning on aircraft handling characteristics are similar to those experienced on an icy or very slippery surface. Some Aeroplane Flight Manuals contain information on handling characteristics and aircraft performance when such surface conditions exist. The guidance given should be used at all times when the contaminant depth is “significant”. Some degree of hydroplaning is possible at any time when the runway is contaminated by water or some other foreign substance.
Chapter 14 Page 13
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways
Types of Hydroplaning 38. Two types of hydroplaning can occur, either individually or together, on wet or icy runways. They are known as DYNAMIC and VISCOUS, and they differ in their initial cause and total duration, but may occur together to give ‘combined’ hydroplaning.
Dynamic Hydroplaning 39.
For this phenomenon to occur, two essential conditions must be present: (a)
The surface must be flooded to a depth which exceeds the total depth of the runway texture plus the tyre tread. This is the critical depth and is normally 3 mm.
(b)
The second condition is that the aircraft must be travelling at or above the critical speed, which is the tyre speed at which the standing inertia of the water is such that the water is unable to escape from under the tyre. If both conditions are present, dynamic hydroplaning is likely to occur.
Viscous Hydroplaning 40. The only essential condition for viscous hydroplaning to occur is a smooth surface covered by a thin film of moisture. It happens at much lower groundspeeds than dynamic hydroplaning and is usually of very short duration. On normal landings at the touchdown point the aircraft tyres slip and skid momentarily until they spin up to their rotational speed. Usually the texture of the runway surface is coarse enough to break up the liquid film, but any deposits of rubber or oil prevent this dissipation taking place. The heat generated by the initial slippage of the tyre is enough to cause a thin layer of rubber to melt and adhere to the runway.
Chapter 14 Page 14
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways
Factors Affecting Hydroplaning 41. It has been determined by research that the size of the tyre footprint directly affects the aircraft’s hydroplaning characteristics. If the tyre is correctly inflated, its footprint is unaffected by changes in AUW. But if the tyre is underinflated, the size of the footprint is increased irrespective of the AUW. An underinflated tyre is more likely to hydroplane than one that is correctly inflated, and it will do so at a lower groundspeed than that at which hydroplaning would normally occur. Aircraft tyres must therefore be in good condition, have adequate tread and be inflated at the correct pressure. If a choice of tyres exists, multi-rib tyres should be selected because they delay the onset of aquaplaning. 42. The airfield operating authorities, during the construction or repair of runways, can assist the pilot by ensuring the runways are porous or grooved to give better tyre traction and that there is adequate drainage to prevent build up of moisture. However, strong crosswinds can defeat good drainage on the windward side of the runway. Aircraft design can also assist by the incorporation of tandem wheel arrangements because they can travel through greater depths of contaminant with less difficulty than others. 43. Dynamic hydroplaning, after its onset, will continue whilst the two essential conditions are maintained. If either the groundspeed falls below the critical speed or the water depth reduces below the critical depth, this type of hydroplaning will not persist.
Calculation of Critical Speed 44. The speed at which braking efficiency begins to deteriorate is difficult to calculate because it is a gradual process, but the speed at which it becomes total can be determined. Tests carried out with an aircraft fitted with bald tyres, on a smooth, wet surface revealed that the speed at which aquaplaning occurred can be calculated from the following formula:
Chapter 14 Page 15
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways (a)
For a non-rotating tyre ρ V P ( spin up ) in knots = 7.7 --σ
(b)
For a rotating tyre ρ V ( spin down ) in knots = 9 --P σ
V P = hydroplaning speed in knots
ρ = tyre pressure lb/in 2 σ==== specific gravity of the contaminant (Note. Tyre pressures can also be measured in kg/cm lb/in
2
2
or in ‘bar’ where 1 bar is equal to 14.7
2 or 1.034 kg/cm .
In simple terms, sub paragraph (b) can be summarised as the critical (start of hydroplaning) speed in knots equal to the square root of the tyre pressure multiplied by 9 . The speed calculated is groundspeed and therefore only in ISA conditions at mean sea level will the calculated speed equate to indicated airspeed (IAS). In any other conditions TAS will represent more accurately the calculated aquaplaning groundspeed. At a higher level airfield for example, a given value of TAS will be achieved at a lower IAS and therefore the calculated aquaplaning speed will be reached at a lower IAS.
Chapter 14 Page 16
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways Note. The formula in sub paragraph (a) is applicable for a landing calculation whereas sub paragraph (b) is applicable for a take-off calculation. Example: Given a tyre pressure of 144lb/in 2 the critical hydroplaning speed is 108kt for take-off.
Precautions on Take-Off 45. On take-off, as the tyre commences to roll on a wet surface at slower speeds, water is able to escape to the sides of the tyre until the speed approaches the critical speed. At this point a wedge of water builds up in front of the tyre and lifts it clear of the surface. Therefore, to avoid the risk of hydroplaning, take-off should not be attempted unless the water depth is less than the critical value for the entire length of the take-off run required.
Precautions on Landing 46. For landing the non-rotating formula should be used to calculate the dynamic hydroplaning speed. If the depth of contaminant exceeds the critical depth, the landing should be delayed until it has drained below the critical depth. Caution is important in this situation. 47. Finally, aeroplane approach speed is also a factor. Every 1% increase in touchdown speed above that recommended for the aircraft mass increases the landing distance required by 2%.
Chapter 14 Page 17
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide
Contaminated Runways Combined Hydroplaning 48. The loss of tyre friction on wet or flooded runways is generally the result of combined effects of dynamic and viscous hydroplaning. If dynamic hydroplaning is predominant the area of the tyre under which the bulk of the water is trapped enlarges as the speed increases. If the contaminant is of less than critical depth, however, and there is no bulk of water present, the major part of the footprint is in contact with a thin film of moisture and viscous hydroplaning is the controlling element.
Reverted Rubber Skids 49. When a tyre is hydroplaning, although the friction available is insufficient to rotate the wheel it does generate sufficient heat, on high pressure tyres, to melt the rubber at the contact point and wear a flat spot on the tyre. The heat also converts water or ice on the runway in the path of the tyre into steam. The tyre therefore rides on a layer of steam. This is particularly dangerous not only because of the ineffectiveness of the brakes but also because of the loss of directional control when the wheels are in a locked condition. Avoidance of reverted rubber skids, as they are called, depends on the pilot using the anti-skid systems of the aircraft to their maximum advantage. 50. All these types of hydroplaning can occur in the same landing run if conditions are appropriate.
Chapter 14 Page 18
© G LONGHURST 1999 All Rights Reserved Worldwide